2007 chevrolet trailblazer owner manual m · 2020-03-06 · how to use this manual many people read...

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 8Rear Seats ............................................. 18Safety Belts ............................................ 20Child Restraints ...................................... 42Airbag System ........................................ 71Restraint System Check ......................... 90

Features and Controls ................................ 93Keys ....................................................... 95Doors and Locks .................................. 100Windows ............................................... 107Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 109Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 112Mirrors .................................................. 132OnStar® System ................................... 145Universal Home Remote System .......... 149Storage Areas ...................................... 160Sunroof ................................................ 164

Instrument Panel ....................................... 165Instrument Panel Overview ................... 168Climate Controls ................................... 185Warning Lights, Gages, and

Indicators .......................................... 195Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 216Audio System(s) ................................... 234

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 299Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 300Towing ................................................. 356

Service and Appearance Care .................. 379Service ................................................. 382Fuel ...................................................... 384Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 390All-Wheel Drive ..................................... 434Rear Axle ............................................. 434Four-Wheel Drive .................................. 435

2007 Chevrolet TrailBlazer Owner Manual M

1

Front Axle ............................................ 436Bulb Replacement ................................ 437Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ... 440Tires ..................................................... 443Appearance Care .................................. 489Vehicle Identification ............................. 499Electrical System .................................. 500Capacities and Specifications ................ 510

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 513Maintenance Schedule .......................... 514

Customer Assistance Information ............. 535Customer Assistance and Information ... 536Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 554

Index .......................................................... 557

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and thenames TRAILBLAZER and EXT are registeredtrademarks of General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes after that time without furthernotice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appearsin this manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15863673 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. Ifyou do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,” “DoNot do this” or “Do Notlet this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. Theyuse the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 8Manual Seats ................................................ 8Power Seats ................................................. 9Manual Lumbar ........................................... 10Power Lumbar ............................................. 10Heated Seats .............................................. 11Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals .............. 11Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 14Head Restraints .......................................... 17

Rear Seats .................................................... 18Rear Seat Operation ................................... 18

Safety Belts .................................................. 20Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 20Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .... 25How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 26Driver Position ............................................. 26Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 34Right Front Passenger Position ................... 35Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 35Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 38Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 41Safety Belt Extender ................................... 41

Child Restraints ............................................ 42Older Children ............................................. 42Infants and Young Children ......................... 45

Child Restraint Systems .............................. 49Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 54Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 56Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Outside Seat Position ...................... 63Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Rear Seat Position ....................... 66Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ......................... 66Airbag System .............................................. 71

Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 74When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 77What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 79How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 79What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ... 80Passenger Sensing System ......................... 82Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 88Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 89Restraint System Check ............................... 90

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 90Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 91

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

Lift the bar located under the front of the seat tounlock it. Slide the seat to where you want itand release the bar. Try to move the seat with yourbody to be sure the seat is locked in place.

8

Power Seats

If the vehicle has powerseats, the controls usedto operate them arelocated on the outboardside of the seats.

To adjust the seat, do any of the following:

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe horizontal control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion by moving the front of the horizontalcontrol up or down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion by moving the rear of the horizontalcontrol up or down.

• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving theentire horizontal control up or down.

If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, thecontrol used to operate them is located behind thepower seat control on the outboard side of theseats. See “Power Reclining Seatbacks”under Reclining Seatbacks on page 14.

9

Manual Lumbar

If your vehicle has thisfeature, there is a knoblocated on theoutboard side of thedriver’s seat.

Turn the top of the knob toward the front of thevehicle to increase lumbar support. Turn the topof the knob toward the rear of the vehicle todecrease lumbar support.

Power LumbarYour vehicle may have power lumbar on thedriver’s and front passenger’s seats.

The seatback lumbarsupport can be adjustedby moving the controllocated on the outboardside of the seatcushions.

To increase or decrease support, hold the controlforward or rearward.

Keep in mind that as your seating positionchanges, as it may during long trips, so should theposition of your lumbar support. Adjust the seatas needed.

10

Heated Seats

Your vehicle may haveheated front seats. Thebuttons used tocontrol this feature arelocated on the frontdoor armrests.The engine must berunning for the heatedseat feature to work.

To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal buttonwith the heated seat and seatback symbol.Press the button to cycle through the temperaturesettings of high, medium, and low and to turnthe heated seat off. The indicator lights above thebutton will come on to designate the level ofheat selected: three for high, two for medium, andone for low. The low setting warms the seatbackand seat cushion until the seat temperature is nearbody temperature. The medium and high settingsheat the seatback and seat cushion to a slightlyhigher temperature. You will be able to feel heat inabout two minutes.

To heat only the seatback, press the verticalbutton with the heated seatback symbol. Anindicator light on the button will come on todesignate that only the seatback is being heated.Additional presses will cycle through the heatlevels for the seatback only.

The feature will shut off automatically when theignition is turned off.

Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the controls forthe memory functionare located on thedriver’s door.

11

These buttons are used to program and recallmemory settings for the driver’s seating position,both outside mirror positions, and the adjustablepedals, if equipped. The settings for these featurescan be saved for up to two drivers.

To store the memory settings, do the following:

1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatbackrecliner and lumbar, both of the outsidemirrors, and the adjustable pedals, ifequipped, to the desired position.See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal onpage 116 for more information.

2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of thememory control for three seconds. Adouble chime will sound to let you know thatthe position has been stored.

To repeat the procedure for a second driver,follow the preceding steps, but press the othernumbered memory control button.

To recall the memory settings, do one of thefollowing:

• Press and release button 1 or 2 while thevehicle is in PARK (P). A single chimewill sound and the memory position will berecalled.

• If programmed to do so through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), pressing theunlock button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter will recall the preset driver’smemory seat, mirrors, and adjustable pedalsposition. The numbers on the back of thetransmitters, 1 or 2, correspond to the numberson the memory controls.

• If programmed to do so through the DIC,placing the key in the ignition will recallthe driver’s memory seat, mirrors, andadjustable pedals positions.

See “Seat Recall” under DIC VehicleCustomization on page 226 for more information.

To stop recall movement of the memory seatfeature at any time, press one of the memorybuttons or power seat controls.

12

Easy Exit SeatThe control for the easy exit seat function islocated on the driver’s door below the memorybuttons 1 and 2. The easy exit seat button is usedto program and recall the desired driver’s seatposition when exiting or entering the vehicle. Themirrors, power lumbar, recline, and adjustablepedals, if equipped, positions will not be stored orrecalled when using the easy exit seat function.The seat position can be saved for up totwo drivers.

To store the easy exit seat position, do thefollowing:

1. Press and release the 1 or 2 button of thememory control for less than three seconds.The seat will move to the stored memoryposition.

2. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.

3. Press and hold the easy exit seat buttonfor more than three seconds. A doublechime will sound to let you know that theposition has been stored for the selectedbutton 1 or 2.

To repeat the procedure for a second driver,follow the preceding steps, but press the othernumbered memory control button.

To recall the easy exit seat position, do one of thefollowing:

• Press the easy exit seat button on thememory control while the vehicle is inPARK (P). The seat will move to the storedexit position.

• Or, if the easy exit seat feature is activated inthe Driver Information Center (DIC), removingthe key from the ignition will move the seatto the exit position. See “Easy Exit Seat” underDIC Vehicle Customization on page 226 formore information on activating this feature inthe DIC.

If an easy exit seat position has not been stored,the default position is all the way rearward.

13

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

If the seats have manual reclining seatbacks, thelever used to operate them is located on theoutboard side of the seat(s).

14

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

If your seats havepower recliningseatbacks, use thevertical powerseat control located onthe outboard side ofthe seat(s).

• To recline the seatback, press the controltoward the rear of the vehicle.

• To raise the seatback, press the controltoward the front of the vehicle.

15

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

16

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraintup to raise it.

To lower the head restraint, press the button,located on the top of the seatback, and push thehead restraint down.

17

Rear Seats

Rear Seat OperationYour vehicle has flip and fold second row seatswhich provide additional cargo space.

To flip and fold the seat(s), do the following:

1. Pull up on the loop located where the seatcushion meets the seatback and flip theseat cushion forward.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

2. Lift the lever,located on theoutboard side of theseatback, andfold the seatbackforward.

The head restraint will automatically fold outof the way as the seatback is folded down.

18

To return the seat(s) to the original position, dothe following:

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

1. Lift the seatback until it locks into the uprightposition. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

2. Return the head restraints to the uprightposition by reaching behind the seat andpulling it forward until it locks into place. Pushand pull on the head restraint to make surethat it is locked.

3. Flip the seat cushion back into place.

19

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

20

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and yourpassengers to buckle your safety belts. See SafetyBelt Reminder Light on page 198 and PassengerSafety Belt Reminder Light on page 198.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, thelaw says to wear safety belts. Here is why:They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you dohave a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

21

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

Put someone on it.

22

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. Therider does not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

23

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

24

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will bein most of them in the future. But they aresupplemental systems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead of them. Everyairbag system ever offered for sale hasrequired the use of safety belts. Even if youare in a vehicle that has airbags, you still haveto buckle up to get the most protection. Thatis true not only in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and other collisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) ofhome. And the greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

25

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 42 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 45. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. Tosee how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.

26

The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 41.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

27

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash.

28

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

29


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

30


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

31


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

32


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have the fullwidth of the belt to spread impact forces. Ifa belt is twisted, make it straight so it canwork properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

33

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as lowas possible, below the rounding, throughoutthe pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

34

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position on page 26.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the way and start again.

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

35

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure itis secure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 41.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

36

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or acrash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out ofthe retractor.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

37

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

There is one guide for each outside passengerposition in the rear seat. Here is how to install thecomfort guide to the shoulder belt:

1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip locatedbetween the interior body and the seatback.

38

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. Theelastic cord must be under the belt. Then,place the guide over the belt and insertthe two edges of the belt into the slotsof the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

39

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn maynot provide the protection needed in acrash. The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 35. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guide. Slide the guide back ontoits storage clip located between the interiorbody and the seatback.

40

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety beltsin a moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcrash if the threshold conditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, if your vehicle hasside impact rollover airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in aside crash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 91.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. Tohelp avoid personal injury, do not let someone elseuse it, and use it only for the seat it is made tofit. The extender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,just attach it to the regular safety belt. Formore information see the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

41

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

42

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by onlyone person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the center ofthe vehicle. Also see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 38. If the child issitting in the center rear seat passengerposition, move the child toward the safety beltbuckle. In either case, be sure that theshoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, sothat in a crash the child’s upper body wouldhave the restraint that belts provide.

43

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

44

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

45

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

46

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

47

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the restraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particular child restraint.In addition, there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, the backand shoulders. Infants always should besecured in appropriate infant restraints.

48

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

49

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint withthe seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infant inplace and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

50

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. With built-in or add-on childrestraints, the child has to be secured withinthe child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

51

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Make surethe child restraint is properly installed inthe vehicle using the vehicle’s safety beltor LATCH system, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system.

See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 56 for more information. A childcan be endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

52

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed ina crash if the child is not properly securedin the child restraint. Make sure the childis properly secured, following theinstructions that came with that restraint.

Because there are different systems, it isimportant to refer to the instructions that comewith the restraint. A child can be endangered in acrash if the child is not properly secured in thechild restraint.

53

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

If your vehicle has a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a labelon your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great, if the airbagdeploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates.

CAUTION: (Continued)


This is because the back of the rear-facingchild restraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured inthe rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the childrestraint in a rear seat.

54

If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint,never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint inthe right front passenger seat unless thepassenger airbag status indicator shows off andthe airbag is off. Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is offbefore using a rear-facing child restraintin the right front seat position.



Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

55

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint with a top tether,you must also use either the lower anchors orthe safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach a child restraintwith these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

56

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

57

Some child restraints that have a top tether aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. Inthe United States, some child restraints also havea top tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors, eachseating position withlower anchors hastwo labels, nearthe crease between theseatback and theseat cushion.

Second Row

58

The labels are located above a flap, at the base ofthe seatback, in the rear outside seatingpositions. The anchors are located under the flap.In order to get to the anchors you will need topull the strap at the center of the seat where theseat cushion meets the seatback. This willallow you to fold the seat cushion up and out ofthe way. Lift the flap to expose the anchorsand then lower the seat cushion. Be sure thecushion is locked into place.

The top tether anchors for each rear seatingposition are located on the floor in the cargo areaof your vehicle. Do not use the rear tie-downbrackets near the liftgate for attaching top tethers.Be sure to use an anchor located on the sameside of the vehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position, if a national or locallaw requires that the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 54 for additional information.

59

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold onlyone child restraint. Attaching more thanone child restraint to a single anchorcould cause the anchor or attachment tocome loose or even break during a crash.A child or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

60

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehicle hasone, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow the instructionsof the child restraint manufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Pull the strap at the center of the seatwhere the seat cushion meets theseatback. This will allow you to fold theseat cushion up and out of the way.Lift the flap to expose the anchors andthen lower the seat cushion. SeeRear Seat Operation on page 18 foradditional information. Be sure thecushion is locked into place.

61

1.3. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.4. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint to thelower anchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Route and tighten the top tether

according to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions. If your vehicle has a cargoshade, route the top tether betweenthe seatback and the cargo shade.

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a singletether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route thetether over theseatback.

62

For vehicles that have ahead restraint, folddown the head restraintand route the singletether under thehead restraint and inbetween the headrestraint posts.

See Rear Seat Operation on page 18.If the position you areusing has a headrestraint and you areusing a dual tether,route the tether aroundthe head restraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Outside Seat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 56.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions that came with thechild restraint. Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

63

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

64

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the instructions that came with thechild restraint and to Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) on page 56.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnectit. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it goback all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

65

Securing a Child Restraint in theCenter Rear Seat PositionMany child restraints are too wide to be correctlysecured in the center rear seat, although someof them will fit there. If the center seat position istoo narrow for your child restraint, secure it ina rear outside seat position.

If you secure a child restraint in the center seatposition, follow the instructions in Securing a ChildRestraint in a Rear Outside Seat Positionon page 63.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag.A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. See Where to Putthe Restraint on page 54.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infantseat or a small child in a forward-facing childrestraint or booster seat is detected. SeePassenger Sensing System on page 82 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 200 formore information on this including importantsafety information.

66

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing child



restraint, no system is fail-safe, and noone can guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off. Werecommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.


If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securingthe forward-facing child restraint. See ManualSeats on page 8 or Power Seats on page 9.

67

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 56.

There is no top tether anchor at the right frontseating position. Do not secure a child seat in thisposition if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that the toptether must be anchored. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 56 ifthe child restraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’sfrontal airbag. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 82. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured in a rearseat, even if the airbag is off. If your childrestraint is forward-facing, move the seat asfar back as it will go before securing thechild restraint in this seat. See Manual Seatson page 8 or Power Seats on page 9.

When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, the off indicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light and stay litwhen you turn the ignition to RUN or START.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 200.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

68

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

69

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.


8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator will comeon and stay on when the key is turned toRUN or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and be readyto work for an adult or larger child passenger.

70

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver anda frontal airbag for the right front passenger.Your vehicle may also have roof-mounted sideimpact airbags designed for either side impact orrollover deployment. Roof-mounted side impactairbags are available for the driver and thepassenger seated directly behind the driver andfor the right front passenger and the passengerseated directly behind that passenger.

If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG will appear onthe airbag covering on the sidewall trim near thedriver’s and right front passenger’s window.

Even if you have no right front passenger seat inyour vehicle there is still an active frontal airbagin the right side of the instrument panel. Donot place cargo in front of this airbag.

{CAUTION:

Be sure that cargo is not near an airbag. Ina crash, an inflating airbag might force thatobject toward a person. This could causesevere injury or even death. Secure objectsaway from the area in which an airbagwould inflate. For more information, seeWhere Are the Airbags? on page 74 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 350.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

71

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts but do notreplace them.

Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed to



inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in manyside crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Roof-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side ofyour vehicle. They are not designed toinflate in frontal or in rear crashes. If thevehicle is equipped with rollover capableairbags, it has been designed to deploythe roof-mounted side impact airbags inthe event of a vehicle rollover. Everyonein your vehicle should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is anairbag for that person.

72

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and roof-mounted side impactairbags inflate with great force, faster thanthe blink of an eye. If you are too close toan inflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 42 or Infants and Young Childrenon page 45.

73

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 199 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

74

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted airbag for thedriver and the person seated directly behindthe driver, it is located in the ceiling above the sidewindows.

75

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted airbag for theright front passenger and the person directlybehind that passenger, it is located in the ceilingabove the side windows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the bag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. And, if your vehiclehas roof-mounted side impact airbags,never secure anything to the roof of yourvehicle by routing the rope or tie downthrough any door or window opening. Ifyou do, the path of an inflating sideimpact airbag will be blocked. The path ofan inflating airbag must be kept clear.

76

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact, and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. Your vehicle has electronicfrontal sensors, which helps the sensing systemdistinguish between a moderate frontal impact anda more severe frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level lessthan full deployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wallthat does not move or deform, the thresholdlevel for the reduced deployment is about9 to 16 mph (14 to 26 km/h), and the thresholdlevel for a full deployment is about 18 to 25 mph(29 to 40 km/h). The threshold level can vary,however, with specific vehicle design, so that it canbe somewhat above or below this range.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight intothe object.

77

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

Your vehicle has seat position sensors whichenables the sensing system to monitor the positionof the driver’s seat and the right front passenger’sseat. Seat position sensors provide informationthat is used to determine if the airbags shoulddeploy at a reduced level or at full deployment.

Your vehicle may or may not have roof-mountedairbags and a rollover sensor. See AirbagSystem on page 71. These “rollover capable”airbags are intended to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes or during a rollover. Aroof-mounted airbag will inflate if the crash severityis above the system’s designed “thresholdlevel.” The threshold level can vary with specificvehicle design. Roof-mounted airbags are notintended to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,or rear impacts. Both roof-mounted airbags willdeploy when either side of the vehicle is struck orduring a rollover.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slowsdown. For roof-mounted airbags, inflation isdetermined by the location and severity ofthe impact.

The airbag system is designed to work properlyunder a wide range of conditions, including off-roadusage. Observe safe driving speeds, especiallyon rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.See Off-Road Driving (Except SS) on page 317for tips on off-road driving.

78

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. Additionally, in the case of a “rollovercapable” roof-mounted side impact airbag, thesensing system detects that the vehicle is about toroll over. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, airbag, and related hardwareare all part of the airbag modules inside thesteering wheel and in the instrument panel in frontof the right front passenger. For vehicles withroof-mounted rollover airbags, the airbag modules,the inflator, and the airbags are located in theceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.Airbags supplement the protection providedby safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually. Butthe frontal airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Roof-mounted rollover airbags would not help youin many types of collisions, including manyfrontal or near frontal collisions, and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions or rollovers for vehicleswith roof-mounted rollover airbags.

79

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, soquickly that some people may not even realizean airbag inflated. Roof-mounted rollover airbagsmay still be at least partially inflated minutesafter the vehicle comes to rest. Some componentsof the airbag module — the steering wheel hubfor the driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for theright front passenger’s airbag, and the areaalong the ceiling of the vehicle near the sidewindows for vehicles with roof–mounted sideimpact airbags — may be hot for a short time. Theparts of the airbag that come into contact withyou may be warm, but not too hot to touch. Theremay be some smoke and dust coming from thevents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation doesnot prevent the driver from seeing out of thewindshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nordoes it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

80

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, andflash the hazard warning flashers when the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors again, turn theinterior lamps off, and turn off the hazard warningflashers by using the controls for those features.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate theairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. Afteran airbag inflates, you will need some newparts for your airbag system. If you do not getthem, the airbag system will not be there to helpprotect you in another crash. A new system willinclude airbag modules and possibly otherparts. The service manual for your vehiclecovers the need to replace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 548.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag system. Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not work properly. Seeyour dealer for service.

81

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system forthe right front passenger’s position. A passengerairbag status indicator in the rearview mirror will bevisible when you turn your ignition key to STARTor RUN.

The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on andoff, will be visible during the system check.When the system check is complete, either theword ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on orthe symbol for off, will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 200.

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the right front passenger’sseat and safety belt. The sensors are designedto detect the presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the passenger’s frontalairbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat, and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

United States

Canada

82

If your vehicle has a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint, alabel on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.



Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.


83

If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint,never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint inthe right front passenger seat unless thepassenger airbag status indicator shows off andthe airbag is off. Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is offbefore using a rear-facing child restraintin the right front seat position.





84

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicatorin the rearview mirror will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 66.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your dealer.

85

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sitting properly in theright front passenger’s seat. When the passengersensing system has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag, depending uponthe person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrownchild restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended.

Restart the vehicle and have the person remain inthis position for about two minutes. This willallow the system to detect that person and thenenable the passenger’s airbag.

86

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system. Ifthis ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 199 formore on this, including important safetyinformation.

Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, canaffect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. You may want to consider not using seatcovers or other aftermarket equipment if yourvehicle has the passenger sensing system. SeeAdding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 89 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the systemoperates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

87

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase aservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 555.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignitionkey is turned off and the battery isdisconnected, an airbag can still inflateduring improper service. You can beinjured if you are close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They areprobably part of the airbag system. Be sureto follow proper service procedures, andmake sure the person performing work foryou is qualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

88

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors. Ifyou have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 536.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, the inside review mirror,ceiling headliner, ceiling and pillar garnish trim,roof-mounted airbag modules, or airbagwiring can affect the operation of the airbagsystem. If you have questions, call CustomerAssistance. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 536.

89

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job,have it repaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Care of Safety Belts on page 493 formore information.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,and have them repaired or replaced. The airbagsystem does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,or the side impact airbag covering on theceiling near the side windows, the airbag maynot work properly. You may have to replacethe airbag module in the steering wheel, boththe airbag module and the instrument panelfor the right front passenger’s airbag, orside impact airbag module and ceiling coveringfor roof-mounted rollover airbags (if equipped).Do not open or break the airbag coverings.

90

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspectedand any necessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need toreplace the driver and front passenger’s safety beltretractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then thenew retractor assembly will be there to help protectyou in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle or while you are driving. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 199.

91

✍ NOTES

92

Keys .............................................................. 95Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 96Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation .................................... 98Doors and Locks ........................................ 100

Door Locks ................................................ 100Power Door Locks ..................................... 101Delayed Locking ........................................ 102Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........ 102Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 105Lockout Protection ..................................... 105Liftgate/Liftglass ......................................... 106

Windows ...................................................... 107Power Windows ........................................ 108Sun Visors ................................................ 109

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 109Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 110Passlock® .................................................. 111

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 112New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 112Ignition Positions ....................................... 113Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 114Starting the Engine .................................... 114Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .......... 116Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 116Active Fuel Management™ ........................ 117Automatic Transmission Operation ............. 118Four-Wheel Drive ...................................... 122Parking Brake ........................................... 126Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 127Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 129Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 129Engine Exhaust ......................................... 130Running the Engine While Parked ............. 131

Section 2 Features and Controls

93

Mirrors ......................................................... 132Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 132Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ....... 132Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar® and Compass ................... 133Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar®, Compass andTemperature Display .............................. 135

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith Compass ........................................ 138

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith Compass and TemperatureDisplay ................................................... 140

Outside Manual Mirrors ............................. 143Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 143Outside Curb View Assist Mirror ................ 144Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 144Outside Heated Mirrors ............................. 145

OnStar® System .......................................... 145

Universal Home Remote System ................ 149Universal Home Remote System

(With Three Round LED) ....................... 149Universal Home Remote System

(With One Triangular LED) ..................... 149Universal Home Remote System

Operation (With Three Round LED) ....... 150Universal Home Remote System

Operation (With One Triangular LED) ..... 156Storage Areas ............................................. 160

Glove Box ................................................. 160Overhead Console ..................................... 160Center Console Storage Area .................... 160Luggage Carrier ........................................ 161Rear Floor Storage Lid .............................. 162Convenience Net ....................................... 162Cargo Cover ............................................. 163Cargo Tie Downs ...................................... 164

Sunroof ....................................................... 164

Section 2 Features and Controls

94

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed.Do not leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.

95

This vehicle has keysthat can be used for theignition and door lockthat will fit witheither side up.

When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealerprovides the owner with a pair of identical keysand a key code number.

The key code number tells your dealer or aqualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keepthis number in a safe place. If you lose yourkeys, you will be able to have new ones madeeasily using this number. Your selling dealershould also have this number.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, callthe GM Roadside Assistance Center. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 542.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemIf the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) system, it operates on a radio frequencysubject to Federal Communications Commission(FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

96

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in range. Thisis normal for any RKE system. If the transmitterdoes not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too farfrom your vehicle. You may need to standcloser during rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 98.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.

97

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationIf your vehicle has this feature, you can lock andunlock your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) upto 30 feet (9 m) away using the RKE transmittersupplied with your vehicle.

K (Unlock): Pressunlock for the driver’sdoor to unlockautomatically, the parkinglamps to flash and theinterior lights to go on.Press the unlock buttona second time withinthree seconds to unlockall the doors.

You can program different feedback settingsthrough the Driver Information Center (DIC). Formore information see Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 216.

Q (Lock): Press lock to lock all the doors. Presslock again within three seconds and the hornwill chirp.

L (Panic): Press the horn symbol to make thehorn sound. The headlamps and taillampswill flash for up to 30 seconds. This can be turnedoff by pressing the horn button again, by waitingfor 30 seconds, or by starting the vehicle.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach RKE transmitter is coded to prevent anothertransmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased through your dealer. Remember tobring any remaining transmitters with you whenyou go to your dealer. When the dealer matchesthe replacement transmitter to your vehicle,any remaining transmitters must also be matched.Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter,the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle.Each vehicle can have a maximum of fourtransmitters matched to it.

98

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your RKEtransmitter should last about two years.

the battery is weak if the transmitter does not workat the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitterworks, it is probably time to change the battery.

The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display aKEY FOB # BATTERY LOW message whenthe transmitter battery is low.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter dothe following:

1. Insert a thin coin in the slot between thecovers of the transmitter housing. Gentlypry the transmitter apart.

2. Remove and replace the battery with athree-volt CR2032 or equivalent battery.

3. Align the covers and snap them together.

4. Check the operation of the transmitter.

99

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. Achild can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle. You can use the remote keyless entrytransmitter.

You can use your key to unlock your door fromthe outside.

100

You can lock or unlockthe door from the insideby sliding the manuallever forward orrearward.

When the door is unlocked, you can see a redarea on the lever.

The manual lever on each door works only thatdoor’s lock.

Power Door Locks

The power door lockswitches are located onthe driver’s and frontpassenger’s doorarmrests.

Press the lock symbol to lock all of the doors. Tounlock the doors, press the other side of theswitch.

101

Delayed LockingThis feature delays the locking of the doors andthe liftgate when using the power lock or theremote keyless entry system.

The first press of the power door lock switch orlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitterwith the driver’s door open will activate thedelay locking. A chime will sound. All doors andthe liftgate can be reopened for up to five secondsfrom the time the last door is closed.

Five seconds after the last door is closed, all thedoors will lock. You can lock the doorsimmediately by using the power door lock switchor by pressing the lock button on the optionalremote keyless entry transmitter a second time.

If the key is inserted in the ignition, this feature willnot lock the doors. See Lockout Protection onpage 105.

You can turn the delayed locking feature on or off.If the feature is turned off, the doors will lockimmediately when a power door lock switch orremote keyless entry transmitter lock buttonis pressed.

Programming Delayed LockingTo turn the delayed locking feature on or off, dothe following:

1. Press and hold the power door lock switch onthe driver’s door in the lock position.

2. Press the remote keyless entry transmitterunlock button twice.

If the delayed locking feature was on, it will nowbe off. If the feature was off, it will now be on.

Programmable Automatic DoorLocksYour vehicle is equipped with an automaticlock/unlock feature which enables you to programyour vehicle’s power door locks. You canprogram this feature through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), or by the following method. SeeDIC Vehicle Customization on page 226.

102

Programmable Locking FeatureFollowing are the two locking modes that can beprogrammed:

Mode 1: All doors lock when the transmission isshifted out of PARK (P).

Mode 2: All doors lock when the vehicle speed isgreater than 8 mph (13 km/h).

The automatic door locks were pre-programmed atthe factory to lock all the doors when thetransmission is shifted into gear. The followinginstructions detail how to program your door locksdifferently than the factory setting. Choose oneof the two programming options listed previouslybefore entering the program mode.

To enter the program mode, do the following:

1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turnsignal/multifunction lever toward you and holdit there while you perform the next step.

2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice.Then, with the key in LOCK, release the turnsignal/multifunction lever. Once you do this,you will hear the lock switch lock and unlock,the horn will chirp twice, and a 30-secondprogram timer will begin.

3. You are now ready to program the automaticdoor locks. Select one of the two programmingoptions listed previously, and press the lockside of the power door lock switch tocycle through the lock options. You will have30 seconds to begin programming. If youexceed the 30-second limit, the lockswill automatically lock and unlock and thehorn will chirp twice to indicate that you haveleft the program mode. If this occurs,repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1 tore-enter the programming mode.

You can exit the program mode any time byturning the ignition to RUN. The locks willautomatically lock and unlock and the horn willchirp twice to indicate that you are leavingthe program mode. If the lock/unlock switches arenot pressed while in the programming mode,the current auto lock/unlock setting will notbe modified.

See your dealer for more information.

103

Programmable Unlocking FeatureThe following is the list of available programmingoptions:

Mode 1: Driver’s door unlocks when thetransmission is shifted into PARK (P).

Mode 2: All doors unlock when the transmissionis shifted into PARK (P).

Mode 3: All doors unlock when the key isremoved from the ignition.

Mode 4: No automatic door unlock.

The automatic door locks were pre-programmed atthe factory to unlock all doors once the transmissionis shifted to PARK (P). The following instructionsdetail how to program your door locks differentlythan the factory setting. Choose one of the fourprogramming options listed previously beforeentering the program mode.

To enter the program mode you need to do thefollowing:

1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turnsignal/multifunction lever toward you and holdit there while you perform the next step.

2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then,with the key in LOCK, release the turnsignal/multifunction lever. Once you do this,you will hear the lock switch lock andunlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a30-second program timer will begin.

3. You are now ready to program the automaticdoor locks. Select one of the four programmingoptions listed above, and press the unlock sideof the power door lock switch to cycle throughthe unlocking options. You will have30 seconds to begin programming. If youexceed the 30-second limit, the locks willautomatically lock and unlock and the horn willchirp twice to indicate that you have left theprogram mode. If this occurs, repeat theprocedure beginning with Step 1 to re-enter theprogramming mode.

You can exit the program mode any time by turningthe ignition to RUN. The locks will automaticallylock and unlock and the horn will chirp twice toindicate that you are leaving the program mode. Ifthe lock/unlock switches are not pressed while inthe programming mode, the current auto lock/unlock setting will not be modified.

See your dealer for more information.

104

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle may have this feature. You can lockthe rear doors so they cannot be opened fromthe inside by passengers. To use one ofthese locks do the following:

1. Open one of the rear doors. You will find asecurity lock lever located on the insideedge of each rear door.

2. Move the leverdown to engage thesecurity lock.Move the lever up todisengage thesecurity lock.

3. Close the door.

The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be openedfrom the inside while this feature is in use. Ifyou want to open the rear door while the securitylock is on, unlock the door and open the doorfrom the outside.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature stops the power door locks fromlocking when the key is in the ignition and a dooris open to protect you from locking your key inthe vehicle.

If the power lock switch is pressed when a door isopen and the key is in the ignition, all the doorswill lock and then the driver’s door will unlock.

105

Liftgate/Liftglass

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with theliftgate or liftglass open because carbonmonoxide (CO) gas can come into yourvehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. Itcan cause unconsciousness and evendeath. If you must drive with the liftgateopen or if electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the liftgate orliftglass:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your climate control

system to its highest speed and selectthe control setting that will forceoutside air into your vehicle. See“Climate Control System” in the Index.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all theway. See Engine Exhaust on page 130.

Liftgate ReleaseTo unlock the liftgate, use the power door lockswitch or the remote keyless entry transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operationon page 98. The liftglass will also unlock when theliftgate is unlocked.

Press the button on the liftglass to open it. Toopen the entire liftgate, lift the handle located inthe center of the liftgate. When the liftgate isopened, the liftglass will lock after a short delay.

Emergency Release for OpeningLiftgate1. Remove the trim plug, located on the inside of

the liftgate in the center, to expose the accesshole in the trim panel.

2. Use a tool to reach through the access hole inthe trim panel.

3. Pry the left release lever up to the unlockposition. Pry the right release lever up tounlatch the liftgate.

4. Reinstall the trim plug.

106

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

107

Power Windows

The controls for the power windows are located onthe armrest on each of the side doors. Withpower windows, the switches operate the windowswhen the ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY orwhen Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) onpage 114. The driver’s door also has a switch foreach of the passenger’s windows.

Press down the top of the switch to lower thewindow and pull up on the switch to raisethe window. If you hold the switch down forthree to seven seconds after the window has beencompletely lowered or raised, the window willnot operate for about 15 seconds.

Express-Down Window

AUTO (Express-down): The driver’s and frontpassenger’s window switches have anexpress-down feature that allows you to lower thewindow without holding the switch down. Pressdown briefly on the driver’s or front passenger’swindow switch labeled AUTO to activate theexpress-down feature. Lightly tap the switch toopen the window slightly. The express-downfeature can be interrupted at any time by pressingthe top of the switch.

108

Window Lockout

o (Lockout): Your vehicle has a lockout feature toprevent passengers from operating the powerwindows. The lockout switch is located in front ofthe window switches on the driver’s door. A light inthe lockout switch will come on to show that theswitch has been activated. Press the lockout switchagain to return to normal operation.

Sun Visors

Sun Visors with Slide RodYour vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sunvisor down to block glare. Detach the sunvisor from the center mount and slide it along therod from side-to-side to cover the driver orpassenger side of the front window. Swing the sunvisor to the side to cover the side window. Itcan also be moved along the rod from side-to-sidein this position.

Sun Visors with Fixed Rod and Pull-outExtensionYour vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sunvisor down to block glare. Pull the sun visorextender out for additional coverage. Detach thesun visor from the center mount and swing it to theside to cover the side window.

Visor Vanity MirrorPull the sun visor down to expose the vanitymirror. You may have to lift a cover to exposethe mirror.

Lighted Visor Vanity MirrorYour vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sunvisor down and lift the mirror cover to turn onthe lamps. The lamps will turn off when the coveris closed.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

109

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle may have a content theft-deterrentalarm system.

The security light islocated on theinstrument panel cluster.

To operate the system, do the following:

1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door with the power door lock switchor the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. The security light should flash.

3. Close all doors. The security light should turnoff after about 30 seconds. The alarm is notarmed until the security light turns off.

If a locked door is opened without the key orthe RKE transmitter, the alarm will go off.The headlamps and parking lamps will flash fortwo minutes, and the horn will sound for30 seconds, then will turn off to save the batterypower.

Remember, the theft-deterrent system will notactivate if you lock the doors with a key or use themanual door lock. It activates only if you use apower door lock switch with the door open, or withthe RKE transmitter. You should also rememberthat you can start your vehicle with the correctignition key if the alarm has been set off.

To avoid setting off the alarm by accident, do thefollowing:

• Always lock the vehicle using the door keyafter the doors are closed.

• Always unlock a door with a key, or use theRKE transmitter. Unlocking a door any otherway will set off the alarm.

If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock anydoor with the key. You can also turn off the alarmby pressing unlock on the RKE transmitter.The alarm will not stop if you try to unlock a doorany other way.

110

Testing the AlarmTo test the alarm, do the following:

1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’swindow and open the driver’s door.

2. Activate the system by locking the doors withthe power door lock switch while the door isopen, or with the RKE transmitter.

3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and waitfor the security light to go out.

4. Then reach in through the window, unlock thedoor with the manual door lock and open thedoor. This should set off the alarm.

When the alarm is set the power door unlockswitch will not work.

If the alarm does not sound when it should but theheadlamps flash, check to see if the horn works.The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 501.

If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps donot flash, the vehicle should be serviced byyour dealer.

Passlock®

Your vehicle has the Passlock® theft-deterrentsystem.

Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system thatenables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turnedwith a valid key. If a correct key is not used or theignition lock cylinder has been tampered with,the fuel system is disabled and the vehicle willnot start.

During normal operation, the security light willturn off about five seconds after the key is turnedto RUN.

If the engine stalls and the security light flashes,wait about 10 minutes until the light stopsflashing before trying to restart the engine.Remember to release the key from START assoon as the engine starts.

If the engine does not start after three tries, thevehicle needs service.

111

If the engine is running and the security light comeson, you will be able to restart the engine if you turnthe engine off. However, your Passlock® system isnot working properly and must be serviced by yourdealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock®

at this time. You may also want to check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 501. Seeyour dealer for service.In an emergency, call the GM RoadsideAssistance Center. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 542.

Starting and Operating YourVehicleNew Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h)

or less for the first 500 miles (805 km).• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast

or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Donot make full-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings are not yet brokenin. Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline every timeyou get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer on page 363 for the trailertowing capabilities of your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

112

Ignition Positions

Use the key to turn the ignition switch to fourdifferent positions.

A (LOCK): This position locks the ignition andtransmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You willonly be able to remove the key when the ignitionis turned to LOCK.

Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK andyou cannot turn it, be sure you are usingthe correct key; if so, is it all the way in? Turnthe key only with your hand. Using a tool toforce it could break the key or the ignitionswitch. If none of these works, then yourvehicle needs service.

B (ACCESSORY): This position lets you usethings like the radio and the windshield wiperswhen the engine is off.

Lengthy operation of features such as the radioin the accessory ignition position may drainthe battery and prevent your vehicle from starting.Do not operate your vehicle in the accessoryignition position for a long period of time.

C (RUN): This is the position for driving.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ACCESSORY or RUN position with theengine off. You may not be able to start yourvehicle if the battery is allowed to drain foran extended period of time.

D (START): This position starts the engine.

113

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transmission. Also, alwaysremember to lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle after ithas been parked for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)Your vehicle has a Retained Accessory Power(RAP) feature which lets certain features of yourvehicle to continue to work up to 20 minutesafter the ignition key is turned to LOCK.

The radio, power windows, the overhead consoleand the sunroof, if the vehicle has one, workwhen the ignition key is in RUN or ACCESSORY.Once the key is turned from RUN to LOCK,these features continue to work for up to20 minutes, or until a door is opened.

Starting the EnginePlace the transmission in the proper gear.

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position -- this is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you coulddamage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P)only when your vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speedwill goes as your engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediately after startingit. Operate the engine and transmission gentlyto let the oil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

114

Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects components.If the ignition key is turned to the STARTposition, and then released when the enginebegins cranking, the engine continues crankingfor a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.If the engine does not start and the key is heldin START for many seconds, cranking stopsafter 15 seconds to prevent cranking motordamage. To prevent gear damage, this systemalso prevents cranking if the engine isalready running. Engine cranking can bestopped by turning the ignition switch to theACCESSORY or LOCK position.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holding itthere as you hold the key in START for up toa maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator. Ifthe vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,do the same thing. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operatethe engine and transmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates all moving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you do not, your engine mightnot perform properly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty.

115

Adjustable Throttle and Brake PedalIf your vehicle has this feature, you can changethe position of the throttle and brake pedals.This feature is designed for shorter drivers, sincethe pedals cannot move farther away from thestandard position, but can move closer for betterpedal reach. If your vehicle has this feature, it canbe programmed to work with the memoryfunction. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedalson page 11.

The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this featureto operate.

The switch used toadjust the pedals islocated on the steeringcolumn.

Press the switch forward or backward to move thepedals closer or farther away from you.

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.

In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,the engine coolant heater can help. You will geteasier starting and better fuel economy duringengine warm-up.

Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in aminimum of four hours prior to starting yourvehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use ofthe coolant heater is not required. Your vehiclemay also have an internal thermostat in theplug end of the cord. This will prevent operation ofthe engine coolant heater when the temperatureis at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. The cord is located on the driver’sside of the engine compartment next to thebattery box facing the engine.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-Volt ACoutlet.

116

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Instead of trying to listeverything here, we ask that you contact yourdealer in the area where you will be parking yourvehicle. The dealer can give you the bestadvice for that particular area.

Active Fuel Management™Your vehicle’s V8 engine may have Active FuelManagement™. This system allows the engine tooperate on either all or half of its cylinders,depending on your driving conditions.

When less power is required, such as cruising at aconstant vehicle speed, the system will operatein the half cylinder mode, allowing your vehicle toachieve better fuel economy. When greaterpower demands are required, such as acceleratingfrom a stop, passing, or merging onto a freeway,the system will maintain full-cylinder operation.

117

Automatic Transmission Operation

There are several different positions for your gearshift lever.

PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. Itis the best position to use when you start theengine because your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P). SeeShifting Into Park (P) on page 127. If youare pulling a trailer, see Towing a Traileron page 363.

118

{CAUTION:

If you have four-wheel drive, your vehiclewill be free to roll — even if your shiftlever is in PARK (P) — if your transfercase is in NEUTRAL. So, be sure thetransfer case is in a drive gear — not inNEUTRAL. See Four-Wheel Drive onpage 122. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 127.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transmission shift lock control system.You have to fully apply the regular brakes first andthen press the shift lever button before you canshift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is

in RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), easepressure on the shift lever and push the shiftlever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintainbrake application. Then press the shift lever buttonand move the shift lever into another gear. SeeShifting Out of Park (P) on page 129.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transmission. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out ofsnow, ice, or sand without damaging yourtransmission, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 348.

119

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at highspeed may damage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Be sure the engine is not running at highspeed when shifting your vehicle.

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. Itprovides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. Ifyou need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), pushthe accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator all the way down.You will shift down to the next gear and havemore power.

Downshifting the transmission in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”under Loss of Control on page 316.

DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer,carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills, or foroff-road driving. You may want to shift thetransmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lowergear selection if the transmission shifts too often.

120

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normaldriving. It reduces vehicle speed more thanDRIVE (D) without using your brakes. You mightchoose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D) whendriving on hilly, winding roads, when towinga trailer, so there is less shifting between gearsand when going down a steep hill.

To shift to the THIRD (3) position, you must firstpress the large button on the shift handle.While the button is pressed, move the shifter inthe THIRD (3) position.

SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speedeven more than THIRD (3) without using yourbrakes. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It canhelp control your speed as you go down steepmountain roads, but then you would also want touse your brakes off and on.

To shift to the SECOND (2) position, you must firstpress the large button on the shift handle. Whilethe button is pressed, move the shifter in theSECOND (2) position.

You can also use SECOND (2) for starting thevehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces.

FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speedeven more than SECOND (2) without usingyour brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, orin deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put inFIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward, thetransmission will not shift into first gear until thevehicle is going slowly enough.

To shift to the FIRST (1) position, you must firstpress the large button on the shift handle.While the button is pressed, move the shifter inthe FIRST (1) position.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using onlythe accelerator pedal may damage thetransmission. The repair will not be covered byyour warranty. If you are stuck, do not spinthe tires. When stopping on a hill, use thebrakes to hold the vehicle in place.

121

Four-Wheel DriveIf your vehicle has four-wheel drive, the engine’sdriving power can be sent to all four wheelsfor extra traction. To get the most satisfaction outof four-wheel drive, you must be familiar withits operation. Read the part that follows beforeusing four-wheel drive. You should use Two-WheelHigh for most normal driving conditions.

Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement inFour-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-DriveLow for an extended period of time may causepremature wear on your vehicle’s powertrain.Do not drive on clean, dry pavement inFour-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-DriveLow for extended periods of time.

Automatic Transfer CaseIf your vehicle has four-wheel drive, the transfercase knob is located to the right of the steeringwheel on the instrument panel.

Use this knob to shiftinto and out offour-wheel drive

2 m (Two-Wheel High): This setting is fordriving in most street and highway situations. Yourfront axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive. Italso provides the best fuel economy.

AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): Thissetting is ideal for use when road conditions arevariable. When driving your vehicle in automaticfour-wheel drive, the front axle is engaged, but thevehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels.When the vehicle senses a loss of traction, thesystem will automatically engage four-wheel drive.Driving in this mode results in slightly lower fueleconomy than Two-Wheel High.

122

4 m (Four-Wheel High): This setting should beused when you need extra traction, such ason snowy or icy roads or in most off-roadsituations. This setting also engages your frontaxle to help drive your vehicle.

4 n (Four-Wheel Low): This setting alsoengages your front axle and delivers extra torque.It sends maximum power to all four wheels.You might choose this setting if you are drivingoff-road in deep sand, deep mud, and climbing ordescending steep hills.

{CAUTION:

Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRALcan cause your vehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in PARK (P). You orsomeone else could be seriously injured.Be sure to set the parking brake beforeplacing the transfer case in NEUTRAL.See Parking Brake on page 126.

NEUTRAL: Shift the vehicle’s transfer case toNEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle.See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 356 formore information.

An indicator light in the knob will show you whichposition the transfer case is in. The indicatorlights will come on briefly when you turn on theignition and one will stay on. If the lights donot come on, you should take your vehicle to yourdealer for service. An indicator light will flashwhile shifting the transfer case. It will stay on whenthe shift is complete. If for some reason thetransfer case cannot make a requested shift, it willreturn to the last chosen setting.

If the service Four-Wheel Drive Warning Light onthe instrument panel cluster stays on, youshould take your vehicle to your dealer for service.See Service Four-Wheel Drive Warning Light onpage 214 for further information.

123

Shifting Into Four-Wheel High or AutomaticFour-Wheel DriveTurn the knob to Four-Wheel High or AutomaticFour-Wheel Drive. This can be done at any speedunless you are shifting out of Four-Wheel Low.The indicator light will flash while shifting. Itwill remain on when the shift is complete.

Shifting Into Two-Wheel HighTurn the knob to Two-Wheel High. This can bedone at any speed unless you are shiftingout of Four-Wheel Low.

Shifting Into Four-Wheel LowTo shift to Four-Wheel Low, the vehicle’s enginemust be running and the vehicle must be stoppedor moving less than 2 mph (3.2 km/h) with thetransmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferredmethod for shifting into Four-Wheel Low is to haveyour vehicle moving 1 or 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).Turn the knob to Four-Wheel Low. You mustwait for the Four-Wheel Low indicator light to stopflashing and stay on before shifting thetransmission into gear.

If you turn the knob to Four-Wheel Low when yourvehicle is in gear and/or moving, the Four-WheelLow indicator light will flash for 30 seconds and notcomplete the shift unless your vehicle is movingless than 2 mph (3.2 km/h) and the transmission isin NEUTRAL (N). After 30 seconds, the transfercase will return to the setting last chosen.

Shifting Out of Four-Wheel LowTo shift from Four-Wheel Low to Four-Wheel High,Auto Four-Wheel Drive, or Two-Wheel High,your vehicle must be stopped or moving less than2 mph (3.2 km/h) with the transmission inNEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. Thepreferred method for shifting out of Four-WheelLow is to have your vehicle moving 1 or 2 mph(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to Four-WheelHigh, Auto Four-Wheel Drive, or Two-Wheel High.You must wait for the Four-Wheel High, AutoFour-Wheel Drive, or Two-Wheel High indicatorlight to stop flashing and stay off before shiftingyour transmission into gear.

124

If the knob is turned to Four Wheel-High, AutoFour-Wheel Drive, or Two-Wheel High when yourvehicle is in gear and/or moving, the Four-WheelHigh, Auto Four-Wheel Drive, or Two-WheelHigh indicator light will flash for 30 seconds. It willnot complete the shift unless your vehicle ismoving less than 2 mph (3.2 km/h) with thetransmission in NEUTRAL (N).

Shifting into NEUTRALBefore shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL, firstmake sure the vehicle is parked so that it willnot roll.

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Start the vehicle.

3. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).

4. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel High.

5. Turn the transfer case knob all of the way pastFour-Wheel Low and hold it there for aminimum of 10 seconds. The neutral indicatorlight will come on.

6. With the engine running, shift the transmissionto REVERSE (R) for one second, then shift thetransmission to DRIVE (D) for one second, toensure that the transfer case is in NEUTRAL.

7. Turn the engine off, by turning the key toACCESSORY.

8. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).

9. Turn the ignition to LOCK.

Shifting Out of NEUTRALTo shift the transfer case out of NEUTRAL, do thefollowing:

1. Set the parking brake and apply the regularbrake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to RUN with the engine off.

3. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).

4. Turn the transfer case knob to the desiredposition (Two-Wheel High, Four-WheelHigh, or Auto Four-Wheel Drive).

5. After the transfer case has shifted out ofNEUTRAL, the indicator light will go out.

6. Release the parking brake.

7. Start the engine and shift the transmission tothe desired position.

125

Parking BrakeTo set the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down with your foot and pull up on theparking brake lever located between the seats. Ifthe ignition is on, the brake system warninglight on the instrument panel cluster will come on.See Brake System Warning Light on page 204.

To release the parking brake, hold the regularbrake pedal down. Pull the parking brake lever upuntil you can press in the button at the end ofthe lever. Hold the button in as you movethe parking brake lever all the way down.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and you must park on ahill, see Towing a Trailer on page 363.

126

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.Your vehicle can roll. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move, evenwhen you are on fairly level ground, usethe steps that follow. With four-wheel drive,your vehicle will be free to roll — even ifyour shift lever is in PARK (P) — if yourtransfer case is in NEUTRAL. So, be surethe transfer case is in a drive gear — not inNEUTRAL. See Four-Wheel Drive onpage 122. Always put the shift lever fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 363.

To shift into PARK (P), do the following:

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your foot andset the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressingthe button on the side of the shift lever andpushing the lever all the way toward the frontof the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. Youknow your vehicle is in PARK (P) if the keycan be removed from the ignition.

127

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set.

If you have four-wheel drive, your vehiclewill be free to roll – even if your lever is inPARK (P) – if your transfer case is inNEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case isin a drive gear – not NEUTRAL. SeeFour-Wheel Drive on page 122.

And, if you leave the vehicle with theengine running, it could overheat andeven catch fire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave your vehicle with theengine running unless you have to.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) andyour parking brake is firmly set before you leave it.After you have moved the shift lever into PARK (P),hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if youcan move the shift lever away from PARK (P)without first pressing the button on the console shiftlever. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasnot fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shiftyour transmission into PARK (P) properly,the weight of the vehicle may put too much forceon the parking pawl in the transmission. Youmay find it difficult to pull the shift lever outof PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” Toprevent torque lock, set the parking brake and thenshift into PARK (P) properly before you leavethe driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting IntoPark (P) on page 127.

128

When you are ready to drive, move the shift leverout of PARK (P) before you release the parkingbrake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, so you can pull the shiftlever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shiftlock control system. You have to fully applythe regular brakes first and then press the shiftlever button before you can shift from PARK (P)when the ignition is in RUN. See AutomaticTransmission Operation on page 118.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

129

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when

driving over high points on the roador over road debris.



• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

130

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 130.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 344.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set your parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

131

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, it willbe free to roll — even if the shift lever isin PARK (P) — if the transfer case is inNEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case isin a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. SeeFour-Wheel Drive on page 122.

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 127.

If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 363.

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorYour vehicle may have this feature. While sitting ina comfortable driving position, adjust the rearviewmirror so you can see clearly behind yourvehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it upor down and side to side. The day/night control,located at the bottom of the mirror, adjuststhe mirror to reduce headlamp glare from behindduring evening or dark conditions. Turn thecontrol clockwise for night use; return it to thecenter for daytime use.

Manual Rearview Mirror withOnStar®

Your vehicle may have a rearview mirror with theOnStar® system.

Control buttons for the OnStar® system are at thebottom of the mirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the OnStar® system and howto subscribe to OnStar®. Also, see OnStar®

System on page 145 for more information aboutthe services OnStar® provides.

132

Mirror OperationWhile sitting in a comfortable driving position,adjust the rearview mirror so you can see clearlybehind your vehicle. Grip it in the center tomove it up or down and side to side. The day/nightcontrol, located at the bottom of the mirror,adjusts the mirror to reduce headlamp glare frombehind during evening or dark conditions.Move the control to the right for night conditions.Return it to the center for daytime use.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar® and CompassYour vehicle may have an automatic-dimmingrearview mirror with a compass and the OnStar®

system.

There are three additional buttons for the OnStar®

system. See your dealer for more informationon the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®.See OnStar® System on page 145 for moreinformation about the services OnStar® provides.

O (On/Off): This is the on/off button.

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming mirror function is turned onautomatically each time the ignition is started.To operate the automatic dimming mirror, do thefollowing:

1. Make sure the green indicator light, located tothe left of the on/off button, is lit. If it’s not,press and hold the on/off button until the greenlight comes on, indicating that the mirror isin automatic dimming mode.

2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror functionby pressing and holding the on/off button untilthe green indicator light turns off.

Compass OperationPress the on/off button once to turn the compasson or off.

There is a compass display in the window in theupper right corner of the mirror face. The compassdisplays a maximum of two characters. Forexample, “NE” is displayed for north-east.

133

Compass CalibrationPress and hold the on/off button to activate thecompass calibration mode. CAL will be displayedin the compass window on the mirror.

The compass can be calibrated by driving thevehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.The mirror is set to zone eight upon leavingthe factory. It will be necessary to adjust thecompass to compensate for compass variance ifyou live outside zone eight. Under certaincircumstances, such as during a long distancecross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust forcompass variance. If not adjusted to accountfor compass variance, your compass could givefalse readings.

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the following zone map.

2. Press and hold the on/off button forsix seconds. Release the button when(FOR ZONE) is displayed. The numbershown is the current zone number.

3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear inthe window on the mirror by pressing the on/offbutton. Once you find your zone number,release the button. After about four seconds,the mirror will return to the compass display,and the new zone number will be set.

134

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar®, Compass andTemperature DisplayYour vehicle may have this feature. When on, anautomatic dimming mirror automatically dimsto the proper level to minimize glare from lightsbehind you after dark.

The mirror also includes a dual display in theupper right corner of the mirror face. The compassreading and the outside temperature will bothappear in the display at the same time.

P (On/Off): This is the on/off button.




Temperature and Compass DisplayPress the on/off button, located to the farleft, briefly to turn the compass/temperaturedisplay on or off.

If the display reads CAL, you will need to calibratethe compass. For more information on calibration,see below.

To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius, do thefollowing:

1. Press and hold the on/off button until either aflashing F or C appears.

2. Press the button again to change the displayto the desired unit of measurement. Afterapproximately four seconds of inactivity, thenew unit will be locked in and the displaywill return.

If an abnormal temperature reading is displayedfor an extended period of time, please consult yourdealer. Under certain circumstances, a delay inupdating the temperature is normal.

135

Compass VarianceThe mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving thefactory. It will be necessary to adjust the compassto compensate for compass variance if you liveoutside of zone eight. Under certaincircumstances, as during a long distancecross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust forcompass variance. Compass variance is thedifference between earth’s magnetic north and truegeographic north. If not adjusted to account forcompass variance, your compass could give falsereadings.



2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z anda zone number appear in the display. Thecompass is now in zone mode.

3. Keep pressing the on/off button until thedesired zone number appears in thedisplay. Release the button. Afterapproximately four seconds of inactivity, thenew zone number will be locked in andthe compass/temperature display will return.

4. Calibrate the compass as described next.

136

Compass CalibrationThe compass may need calibration if one of thefollowing occurs:

• After approximately five seconds, the displaydoes not show a compass heading (N forNorth, for example), there may be a strongmagnetic field interfering with the compass.Such interference may be caused by amagnetic antenna mount, magnetic note padholder or a similar magnetic item.

• The compass does not display the correctheading and the compass zone varianceis set correctly.

In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in themirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed,press and hold the on/off button until CAL isdisplayed.


Passenger Airbag IndicatorThe vehicle may be equipped with a passengerairbag indicator, on the mirror glass, just above thebuttons. If the vehicle has this feature, themirror will display the word ON, or an airbagsymbol in Canada, when the passenger airbag isenabled. For more information, see PassengerSensing System on page 82.

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner. Donot spray glass cleaner directly on the mirroras that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter themirror housing.

137

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith CompassYour vehicle may have an automatic-dimmingrearview mirror with a compass.

O (On/Off): This is the on/off button for theautomatic dimming feature and compass.




Compass OperationPress the on/off button once to turn the compasson or off.

There is a compass display in the window in theupper right corner of the mirror face. The compassdisplays a maximum of two characters. Forexample, “NE” is displayed for north-east.

Compass CalibrationPress and hold the on/off button to activate thecompass calibration mode. CAL will be displayedin the compass window on the mirror.


138

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.The mirror is set to zone eight upon leavingthe factory. It will be necessary to adjust thecompass to compensate for compass variance ifyou live outside zone eight. Under certaincircumstances, such as during a long distancecross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust forcompass variance. If not adjusted to accountfor compass variance, your compass could givefalse readings.



2. Press and hold the on/off button forsix seconds. Release the button when(FOR ZONE) is displayed. The numbershown is the current zone number.

3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear inthe window on the mirror by pressing the on/offbutton. Once you find your zone number,release the button. After about four seconds,the mirror will return to the compass display,and the new zone number will be set.

139

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith Compass and TemperatureDisplayIf the vehicle is equipped with an automatic mirror,it will, when on, automatically dim to the properlevel to minimize glare from lights behind youafter dark.

The mirror also includes a display in the upperright corner of the mirror face. The compassreading and the outside temperature will bothappear in the display at the same time. The dualdisplay can be turned on or off by brieflypressing either the TEMP or the COMP button.




140

Temperature DisplayThe temperature can be displayed by pressingthe TEMP button. Pressing the TEMP button oncebriefly, will toggle the temperature reading onand off. To alternate the temperature readingbetween Fahrenheit and Celsius, press andhold the TEMP button until the display blinks Fand C. Press and release the TEMP buttonto toggle between the Fahrenheit and Celsiusreadings. After approximately four secondsof inactivity, the display will stop blinking anddisplay the last selection made.

If an abnormal reading is displayed, for anextended period of time, please consult yourdealer. Under certain circumstances, a delay inupdating the temperature is normal.

Compass OperationPress the COMP button once briefly to turn thecompass on or off.

When the ignition and the compass feature areon, the compass will show two character boxes forapproximately two seconds. After two seconds,the mirror will display the compass heading.

Compass CalibrationThe compass may need calibration if one of thefollowing occurs:

• If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.

• After approximately five seconds, the displaydoes not show a compass heading (N forNorth, for example), there may be a strongmagnetic field interfering with the compass.Such interference may be caused by amagnetic antenna mount, magnetic note padholder or a similar magnetic item.

• The compass does not display the correctheading and the compass zone varianceis set correctly.

In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in themirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed,press and hold the COMP button until CAL isdisplayed.


141

Compass VarianceThe mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving thefactory. It will be necessary to adjust the compassto compensate for compass variance if you liveoutside zone eight. Under certain circumstances,as during a long distance cross-country trip, itwill be necessary to adjust for compass variance.Compass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.If not adjusted to account for compass variance,your compass could give false readings.

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:1. Find your current location and variance

zone number on the following zone map.2. Press and hold the COMP button until a zone

number appears in the display. 3. Press the COMP button on the bottom of themirror until the new zone number appears inthe display. After you stop pressing thebutton, the display will show a compassdirection within a few seconds.

142

Passenger Airbag IndicatorThe mirror may be equipped with a passengerairbag indicator on the mirror glass, just above thebuttons. If the vehicle has this feature the mirrorwill display the word ON, or an airbag symbolin Canada, when the passenger airbag is enabled.For more information see Passenger SensingSystem on page 82.

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner. Donot spray glass cleaner directly on the mirroras that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter themirror housing.

Outside Manual MirrorsIf the vehicle has the manual outside mirrors,adjust each outside mirror so that a little ofthe vehicle and the area behind it can be seenwhile sitting in a comfortable, driving position.

Both mirrors can be manually folded inwardby pulling them towards the vehicle. Push themirrors away from the vehicle, to the normalposition, before driving.

Outside Power MirrorsYour vehicle may have this feature. The powermirror control is located on the driver’s door.

Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise toadjust the driver’s or passenger’s mirror sothat you can see a little of the side of your vehicle.After adjusting the position of the mirrors, turnthe knob to the center position so that the mirrorscannot move.

If the travel position in any direction of the mirroris reached, it will enter a ratcheting mode.This action is harmless. It is a warning that themirror can go no further. To stop this action, backthe mirror up by moving the knob in the oppositedirection.

The mirrors can be manually folded inward toprevent damage when going through an automaticcar wash. To fold, push the mirror toward thevehicle. To return the mirror to its original position,push outward. Be sure to return both mirrors totheir original unfolded position before driving.

143

Outside Curb View Assist MirrorIf the vehicle has this feature, the passenger’soutside mirror will adjust to a preset tilt positionwhile the vehicle is in REVERSE (R) gear.Curb view assist may be useful when you areparallel parking. The mirror will return to normalposition when the vehicle is shifted out ofREVERSE (R) gear. Automatic mirror movementin either direction will follow a short delay.

You may be able to turn this feature on or offthrough the Driver Information Center (DIC). SeeDIC Vehicle Customization on page 226.

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right or left lane, you could hit avehicle. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger’s outside mirror is convex. Aconvex mirror’s surface is curved so more can beseen from the driver’s seat.

144

Outside Heated MirrorsIf the vehicle has this feature, when the rearwindow defogger is turned on, the outside driver’sand passenger’s rearview mirrors also heat tohelp clear them of ice, snow, and condensation.See Dual Climate Control System on page 185 orDual Automatic Climate Control System onpage 188 for more information.

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at

1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancelyour OnStar® service at any time by contactingOnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®

Owner’s Guide and the OnStar® Terms andConditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®

Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contactOnStar® at 1–888–4–ONSTAR (1–888–466–7827)or TTY 1–877–248–2080, or press the OnStar®

button to speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours aday, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

145

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, theSafe & Sound Plan, or the Directions &Connections® Plan is included for one year fromthe date of purchase. You can extend thisplan beyond the first year, or upgrade to theDirections & Connections® Plan. For moreinformation, press the OnStar® button to speakwith an advisor. Some OnStar® services (such asRemote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle LocationAssistance) may not be available until you registerwith OnStar®.

Available Services with Safe &Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification(AACN) (If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM® Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor

Available Services included withDirections & Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

146

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be usedwith OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan, depending oneligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®

Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak withan OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®

button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutesto access location-based weather, local trafficreports, and stock quotes. By pressing the phonebutton and giving a few simple voice commands,you can browse through the various topics.See the OnStar® Owner’s Guide for moreinformation.

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 294 for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used todial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

147

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services, yourvehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability ofrecording and transmitting vehicle information. Thisinformation is automatically sent to an OnStar® CallCenter at the time of an OnStar® button press,Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACNsystem deploys. The vehicle information usuallyincludes your GPS location and, in the event of acrash, additional information regarding the accidentthat your vehicle has been involved in (e.g. thedirection from which your vehicle was hit). Whenyou use the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle also sendsOnStar® your GPS location so that we can provideyou with location-based services.

OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicleis in a place where OnStar® has an agreementwith a wireless service provider for service in thatarea. OnStar® service also cannot work unlessyou are in a place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar® has hired for that areahas coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technology that

is compatible with the OnStar® service. Not allservices are available everywhere, particularly inremote or enclosed areas, or at all times.

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.

Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of your radioto hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light next to theOnStar® buttons is red, this means that your systemis not functioning properly and should be checkedby a dealer. If the light appears clear (no light isappearing), your OnStar® subscription has expired.You can always press the blue OnStar® button toconfirm that your OnStar® equipment is active.

148

Universal Home RemoteSystem

Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED)The Universal Home Remote System provides away to replace up to three hand-heldRadio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used toactivate devices such as garage door openers,security systems, and home lighting.


1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is KOBGTE05A.




The Canadian Registration ID number is3521A-GTE05A.


Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED)The Universal Home Remote System provides away to replace up to three hand-heldradio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.

149




The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is CB2SAHL3.




The Canadian Registration ID number is2791021849A.


Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal Home RemoteSystem. If there are three round Light EmittingDiode (LED) above the Universal Home RemoteSystem buttons, follow the instructions below. Ifthere is one triangular LED above the UniversalHome Remote System buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (with one triangular LED).

This system provides a way to replace up to threeremote control transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.

150

Do not use the this system with any garage dooropener that does not have the stop and reversefeature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the transmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in programming thetransmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remote controltransmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as, forfuture programming. You only need the originalremote control transmitter for fixed codeprogramming. It is also recommended that uponthe sale or lease termination of the vehicle,the programmed buttons should be erased forsecurity purposes. See “Erasing your UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in this section.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of thegarage door or security device you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

If you do not know if your garage door opener is afixed code or rolling code device, open yourgarage door opener’s remote control battery cover.Your garage door opener is a fixed code deviceif there is a panel of switches. If not, yourgarage door opener is a rolling code device.

151

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed CodeFixed Code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed codeuses the same coded signal every time, whichis manually programmed by setting DIP switchesfor a unique personal code.

Follow these steps to program up to threechannels:

1. Remove the battery cover of the hand-heldtransmitter.

2. Write down the eight to 12 coding switchsettings from left to right. When the switchis in the up position, write “on,” and when aswitch is in the down position, write “off”.If a switch is set between the up and downposition, write “middle”.

3. Enter these positions into the Universal HomeRemote System as follows.Press and release all three buttons at the sametime to put the device into programming mode.

Example of Switch Settings

152

4. The indicator light will blink slowly. In orderfrom left to right, and within two and one-halfminutes, enter each switch setting into theUniversal Home Remote System. Pushone button for each switch as follows:

• Left button = “on” switch position.

• Right button = “off” switch position.

• Middle button = “middle” switch position.

5. After entering the switch settings, press andrelease all three buttons at the same time.The indicator lights will turn on.

6. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light abovethe selected button should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button from five to55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

8. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 8, choosinga different function button in Step 7 than whatyou used for the garage door opener.

Example

153

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling CodeRolling code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced after 1996 and arecode protected. Rolling code means the codedsignal is changed every time your remote controlgarage door opener is used.

Programming a rolling code garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, so read theentire procedure before you begin. If you do notfollow these actions, the device will time outand you will have to repeat the procedure.

Follow these steps to program up to threechannels:

1. Press the two outside buttons at the sametime for one to two seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.

2. Go to the garage. Locate the garage doormotor head and press and release the“learn” button.After pressing the “learn” button, you have10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4depending on your garage control unit. If youcannot locate the “learn” button, refer tothe owners guide for your garage door opener.

154

3. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light, abovethe selected button, should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button from five to20 seconds.

4. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

5. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 6, choosinga different function button in Step 4 than whatyou used for the garage door opener.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming Universal HomeRemote ButtonsYou can reprogram any of the three buttons byrepeating the instructions.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsYou should erase the programmed buttons whenyou sell the vehicle or terminate your lease.

To erase either rolling code or fixed code on theUniversal Home Remote device, do the following:

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons atthe same time for approximately 20 seconds,until the indicator lights, located directlyabove the buttons, begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,release both buttons. The codes from allbutton will be erased.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 540.

155

Universal Home RemoteSystem Operation(With One Triangular LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal HomeRemote System. If there is one triangular LightEmitting Diode (LED) above the UniversalHome Remote buttons, follow the instructionsbelow. If your vehicle has three round LED abovethe Universal Home Remote buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (with three round LED).

Do not use the Universal Home Remote with anygarage door opener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured before April 1, 1982. Ifyou have a newer garage door opener with rolling

codes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 tocomplete the programming of your Universal HomeRemote Transmitter.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the Universal Home Remote.Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful tohave another person available to assist you inthe programming steps.

Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use inother vehicles as well as for future UniversalHome Remote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed Universal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. See“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later inthis section or, for assistance, see CustomerAssistance Offices on page 540.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate operator you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

It is recommended that a new battery be installedin your hand-held transmitter for quicker andmore accurate transmission of the radio-frequencysignal.

156

Programming Universal Home RemoteFollow these steps to program up to threechannels:

1. Press and hold down the two outsideUniversal Home Remote buttons, releasingonly when the Universal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and do not repeatthis step to program a second and/orthird hand-held transmitter to the remainingtwo Universal Home Remote buttons.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitterabout 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttons whilekeeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both thedesired Universal Home Remote buttonand the hand-held transmitter button. Do notrelease the buttons until Step 4 has beencompleted.Some entry gates and garage door openersmay require you to substitute Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “Gate Operator andCanadian Programming” later in this section.

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first andthen rapidly after Universal Home Remotesuccessfully receives the frequency signalfrom the hand-held transmitter. Release bothbuttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained UniversalHome Remote button and observe theindicator light.If the indicator light stays on continuously,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the Universal HomeRemote button is pressed and released.To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 under“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Donot repeat Step 1 as this will erase all ofthe programmed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and then turns to a constant light,continue with Steps 6 through 8 following tocomplete the programming of a rolling-codedevice, most commonly, a garage door opener.

157

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually befound where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and holdthe programmed Universal Home Remotebutton for two seconds, then release. Repeatthe press/hold/release sequence a secondtime, and depending on the brand of thegarage door opener or other rolling codedevice, repeat this sequence a third time tocomplete the programming.The Universal Home Remote should nowactivate the rolling-code device.

To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do notrepeat Step 1, as this will erase all previousprogramming from the Universal Home Remotebuttons.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to time out or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not be long enoughfor Universal Home Remote to pick up the signalduring programming. Similarly, some U.S. gateoperators are manufactured to time out inthe same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator or garage dooropener by using the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the Universal HomeRemote button while you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitterbutton until the frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” to complete.

158

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate Universal HomeRemote button for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsTo erase programming from the three UniversalHome Remote buttons do the following:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttonsuntil the indicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold the two outsidebuttons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

The Universal Home Remote is now in the training(learning) mode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with Step 2 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” shown earlier inthis section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they canbe reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming aSingle Universal Home Remote Button” followingthis section.

Reprogramming a Single UniversalHome Remote ButtonTo program a device to Universal Home Remoteusing a Universal Home Remote buttonpreviously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired Universal HomeRemote button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the UniversalHome Remote button, proceed with Step 2under “Programming Universal Home Remote”shown earlier in this section.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 540.

159

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open, pull up on the handle. Use the key tolock and unlock.

Overhead ConsoleYour vehicle may have this feature. The overheadconsole may include reading lamps, a UniversalHome Remote and a sunroof switch. See Sunroofon page 164 and Universal Home RemoteSystem (With Three Round LED) on page 149 orUniversal Home Remote System (With OneTriangular LED) on page 149 for more information.

Center Console Storage AreaSqueeze the front lever on the center consolewhile lifting the top to open it.

Your vehicle’s console will have cupholderslocated on the front and rear of the storagecompartment.

The console may also contain one or more of thefollowing components:

• Rear Seat Audio Controls

• Rear Seat Accessory Power Outlets

• Rear Climate Control

To open the center armrest compartment, lift thecover by pulling up on the latch handle locatedunderneath the front edge of the armrest.

160

Luggage Carrier

{CAUTION:

If you try to carry something on top ofyour vehicle that is longer or wider thanthe luggage carrier — like paneling,plywood, a mattress and so forth — thewind can catch it as you drive along. Thiscan cause you to lose control. What youare carrying could be violently torn off,and this could cause you or other driversto have a collision, and of course damageyour vehicle. You may be able to carrysomething like this inside. But, nevercarry something longer or wider than theluggage carrier on top of your vehicle.

If your vehicle has a luggage carrier, it will allowyou to load things on top of your vehicle. Theluggage carrier has side rails attached to the roof,places to use for tying things down and may

have sliding crossrails. These let you load someother things on top of your vehicle, as long as theyare not wider or longer than the luggage carrier.

To slide the crossrails to where you wantthem, pull up on the lever on each side of thecrossrail. This releases the crossrail and allowsyou to slide it. When the crossrail is whereyou want it, press down on the levers to lock itinto place.

Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrierthat weighs more than 220 lbs (100 kg) orhangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle maydamage your vehicle. Load cargo so that itrests on the slats as far forward as possibleand against the side rails, making sure tofasten it securely.

Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacitywhen loading your vehicle. For more informationon vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading YourVehicle on page 350.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you aredriving, check now and then to make surethe luggage carrier is locked and cargo is stillsecurely fastened.

161

When the luggage carrier is not in use, place thecrossrails at the following positions for windnoise reduction. Place one crossrail at the rearmost point of the vehicle and the other crossrailabove the opening of the rear door.

Rear Floor Storage Lid

{CAUTION:

If any removable convenience item is notsecured properly, it can move around in acollision or sudden stop. People in thevehicle could be injured. Be sure tosecure any such item properly.

Your vehicle has a rear cargo area with aremovable storage lid.

To remove the rear floor storage lid, do thefollowing:

1. Press the latch release and lift up the latchhandle.

2. Raise the lid slightly to unhook it.

3. Pull the lid toward you to release it from theforward mounting tabs.

To reinstall the rear floor storage lid, reverse theprevious steps. Make sure the lid is secure byapplying slight pressure to the latch until you hearit click.

Convenience NetYour vehicle may have this feature. A conveniencenet in the rear of your vehicle helps keep smallitems in place during sharp turns or quickstops and starts. The net is not designed to retainthese items during off-road use. The net is notfor larger, heavier items.

162

To use the convenience net, do the following:

1. Attach the upper loops to the retainers on bothsides of the liftgate opening. The label shouldbe in the upper passenger’s side corner,visible from the rear of the vehicle.

2. Attach the lower hooks to the rear cargo tiedowns on the floor.

Cargo CoverIf your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use itto cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle.

To install the cargo cover, do the following:

1. Align the endcap with the pocket in the trimpanel located behind the rear seat.

2. Squeeze the opposite endcap, align it with thepocket located on the opposite side of the trimpanel and release.

3. Grasp the handle and unroll the cover.

4. Latch the posts into the sockets on the insideof the vehicle to secure it.

To remove the cargo cover, do the following:

1. Release the cover from the latch posts andcarefully roll it back up.

2. Squeeze one endcap and remove it from thepocket in the trim panel.

3. Remove the cargo cover from the otherendcap so that you can remove the shadefrom the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

An improperly stored cargo cover couldbe thrown about the vehicle during acollision or sudden maneuver. You orothers could be injured. If you remove thecover, always store it in the properstorage location. When you put it back,always be sure that it is securelyreattached.

163

Cargo Tie Downs

There are cargo tiedowns in the rear ofyour vehicle that allowyou to strap cargoin and keep it frommoving.

SunroofThe vehicle may be equipped with a power slidingsunroof. To open or close the sunroof, theignition must be turned to RUN, ACCESSORY,or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) mustbe active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 114.

Press and release theback of the control inthe overhead console toopen the sunroof.Press the front of thecontrol to close thesunroof.

Once the sunroof is closed, press the forward sideof the control to open the sunroof to the ventposition.

The sunroof has a sunshade which can be pulledforward to block sun rays. If it is in the closedposition, it will open when the sunroof is opened.

164

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 168Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 170Other Warning Devices ............................. 170Horn .......................................................... 170Tilt Wheel .................................................. 170Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 171Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 171Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 172Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 172Windshield Wipers ..................................... 173Windshield Washer .................................... 173Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 174Cruise Control ........................................... 174Headlamps ................................................ 178Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 178Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 179Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 179Fog Lamps ................................................ 180Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 181Dome Lamps ............................................. 181Dome Lamp Override ................................ 181Entry Lighting ............................................ 182Exit Lighting .............................................. 182

Reading Lamps ......................................... 182Electric Power Management ...................... 182Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 183Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 183Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 184

Climate Controls ......................................... 185Dual Climate Control System ..................... 185Dual Automatic Climate Control

System .................................................. 188Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 192Rear Climate Control System .................... 193

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 195Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 196Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 197Trip Odometer ........................................... 197Tachometer ............................................... 197Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 198Passenger Safety Belt

Reminder Light ...................................... 198Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 199Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 200Charging System Light .............................. 203

Section 3 Instrument Panel

165

Voltmeter Gage ......................................... 203Brake System Warning Light ..................... 204Anti-Lock Brake System

Warning Light ........................................ 205StabiliTrak® Service Light ........................... 206StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ......................... 206Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 207Tire Pressure Light .................................... 207Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 208Oil Pressure Gage ..................................... 211Change Engine Oil Light ........................... 212Security Light ............................................ 212Cruise Control Light .................................. 213Reduced Engine Power Light .................... 213Highbeam On Light ................................... 213Service Four-Wheel Drive

Warning Light ........................................ 214Check Gages Warning Light ...................... 214Gate Ajar Light .......................................... 214Fuel Gage ................................................. 215Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 215Check Gas Cap Light ................................ 215

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 216DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 217DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 220DIC Vehicle Customization ........................ 226

Audio System(s) ......................................... 234Setting the Time ........................................ 236Radio with CD (Base) ............................... 236Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 246Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................. 255Using an MP3 ........................................... 268XM Radio Messages ................................. 274Navigation/Radio System ........................... 277Rear Seat Entertainment System ............... 277Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................. 292Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 293Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 294Radio Reception ........................................ 295Care of Your CDs and DVDs .................... 296Care of the CD and DVD Player ............... 296Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 296XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 297Chime Level Adjustment ............................ 297

Section 3 Instrument Panel

166

✍ NOTES

167

Instrument Panel Overview

168

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Exterior Lamp Control. See Headlamps onpage 178. Dome Lamp Override Button. SeeDome Lamp Override on page 181. InstrumentPanel Brightness Control. See InstrumentPanel Brightness on page 181. Fog LampButton (If Equipped). See Fog Lamps onpage 180.

B. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 192.

C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 171.

D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument PanelCluster on page 196.

E. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions onpage 113.

F. Transfer Case Controls. See “AutomaticTransfer Case” under Four-Wheel Drive onpage 122.

G. Rear Window Washer/Wiper. See WindshieldWasher on page 173.

H. Audio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 234.

I. Climate Controls. See Dual Climate ControlSystem on page 185.

J. Hood Release. See Hood Release onpage 390.

K. Ashtray. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighteron page 184.

L. Shift Lever and StabiliTrak® Button. SeeShifting Into Park (P) on page 127 andStabiliTrak® System on page 307.

M. Lighter. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighteron page 184.

N. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 183.

O. Rear Window Defogger. See “Rear WindowDefogger” under Dual Climate Control Systemon page 185 and Dual Automatic ClimateControl System on page 188.

P. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 160.

169

Hazard Warning FlashersThe hazard warning flashers warn others. Theyalso let police know you have a problem. Your frontand rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

The hazard warningflasher button islocated on top of thesteering column.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter whatignition position the key is in, and even if thekey is not in the ignition.Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornTo sound the horn, press the horn symbols on thesteering wheel pad.

Tilt WheelThe steering wheel should be adjusted beforeyou drive.

The tilt lever is locatedto the left of the steeringcolumn, under theturn signal lever.

It can be raised to the highest level to give yourlegs more room when you enter and exit thevehicle.To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pullthe lever toward you. Move the steering wheelto a comfortable level, then release the leverto lock the wheel in place.

170

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane Change Signals

• 23 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

• Flash-to-Pass Feature

• N Windshield Wipers

• J Windshield Washer

• I Cruise Control

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionslet you signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the leverreturns automatically.

An arrow on theinstrument panelcluster flashes in thedirection of the turnor lane change.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete your lane change. The lever returns byitself when released. The bottom of the outsiderearview mirrors might also have lane changeindicators.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if thearrows flash more quickly than normal, a signalbulb could be burned out and other drivers will notsee your turn signal.

171

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows do not go on at all whenyou signal a turn, check the fuse. See Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 501 and check forburned-out bulbs.

If you have a trailer towing option with addedwiring for the trailer lamps, a turn signal flasher isused. With this flasher installed, the signalindicator flashes even if a turn signal bulb isburned out. Check the front and rear turn signallamps regularly to make sure they are working.

Turn Signal On ChimeIf your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of amile (1.2 km), a chime sounds at each flash ofthe turn signal. To turn off the chime, movethe turn signal lever to the off position.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low to highbeam, push the lever toward the instrument panel.To return to low-beam headlamps, pull themultifunction lever toward you. Then release it.

When the high beamsare on, this indicator lighton the instrument panelcluster will also be on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beamheadlamps to signal a driver in front of you thatyou want to pass. It works even if your headlampsare in the automatic position.

To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you,then release it.

If the headlamps are in the automatic position oron low beam, the high-beam headlamps turnon. They will stay on as long as you hold the levertoward you. The high-beam indicator on theinstrument panel cluster comes on. Release thelever to return to normal operation.

172

Windshield Wipers8 (Mist): Turn the band to mist, for a singlewiping cycle. Hold it there until the wipers start.Then let go. The wipers will stop after one wipe.If more wipes are needed, hold the band onmist longer.

9 (Off): Move the band to off, to stop the wipers.

N (Windshield Wipers): Turn the band tocontrol the windshield wipers.The wiper speed can be set for a long or shortdelay between wipes. This can be very useful inlight rain or snow. Turn the band to choosethe delay time. The closer to the top of the lever,the shorter the delay.For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band awayfrom you to the first solid band past the delaysettings. For high-speed wiping, turn the bandfurther, to the second solid band past the delaysettings. To stop the wipers, move the band to off.Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If they are frozen to thewindshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If theblades do become worn or damaged, get newblades or blade inserts.

Windshield Washer

L (Windshield Washer): To spray washer fluidon the windshield, press the windshield washerpaddle. The wipers will clear the window and theneither stop or return to your preset speed.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

173

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

This control is located tothe right of the steeringwheel on theinstrument panel.

To turn the rear wiper on, turn the control toeither 1, 2, or 3. For delayed wiping, turn thecontrol to 1 or 2. For steady wiping, turn the controlto 3. To turn the wiper off, turn the control to 0.

To wash the rear window, press the washersymbol located in the center of the control.The rear window washer uses the same fluidbottle as the windshield washer. However, the rearwindow washer will run out of fluid before thewindshield washer. If you can wash yourwindshield but not your rear window, check thefluid level.

Cruise Control

Your vehicle has cruisecontrol. The controls arelocated on the end ofthe turn signal/multifunction lever.

R (On): Move the switch to this position to turnthe cruise control system on.

S (Resume/Accelerate): Move the switch to thisposition to resume a set speed or to accelerate.

174

T (Set): Press this button, located at the end ofthe lever, to set a speed.

9 (Off): Move the switch to this position to turnthe cruise control system off and cancel memoryof a set speed.

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed ofabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

If you apply the brakes, the cruise control shuts off.

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.



Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

175

Setting Cruise Control

1. Move the cruise control switch to on.

2. Get up to the speed you want.

3. Press the set button at the end of the leverand release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Theaccelerator pedal will not go down.

Some vehicles have acruise light on theinstrument panel clusterthat will come on whenthe cruise control isengaged.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This, ofcourse, shuts off the cruise control. But you do notneed to reset it.

Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, you can move the cruise control switchbriefly from on to resume/accelerate.

You will go right back up to the previously chosenspeed and stay there.

If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate, thevehicle keeps going faster until you releasethe switch or apply the brakes. So unless youwant to go faster, do not hold the switch atresume/accelerate.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Press the button at the end of thelever, then release the button and theaccelerator pedal. You will now cruise at thehigher speed.

• Move the cruise switch from on to resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to thedesired speed and then release the switch.To increase your speed in very small amounts,move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate.Each time you do this, your vehicle will goabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

176

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlPress in the set button at the end of the leveruntil you reach the desired speed, then release it.Each time you do this, you will go about1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase yourspeed. When you take your foot off the pedal,your vehicle will slow down to the cruise controlspeed set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control works on hillsdepends upon your speed, load and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steep hills, you maywant to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain

your speed. When going downhill, you may haveto brake or shift to a lower gear to keep yourspeed down. Of course, applying the brake takesyou out of cruise control. Many drivers find thisto be too much trouble and do not use cruisecontrol on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are three ways to turn off the cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.

• Move the cruise switch to off, or

• Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or theignition, the cruise control set speed memoryis erased.

177

Headlamps

The exterior lampsknob is located onyour instrument panelto the left of thesteering wheel.

c (Off): Turn the knob to this symbol andrelease it to turn off the Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) and the Automatic Headlamps (AHS).An indicator illuminates when the positionis selected. This position is not available forvehicles first sold in Canada.

i (Automatic DRL/AHS): Turn the knob tothis symbol to put the system into automaticheadlamp mode. An indicator comes on whenthe position is selected.

; (Parking Lamps): Turn the knob to thissymbol to turn on the parking lamps, as well asthe following:• Sidemarker Lamps• Taillamps• License Plate Lamps• Instrument Panel Lights

2 (Headlamps): Turn the knob to this symbol toturn on the headlamps, as well as the following:• Parking Lamps• Sidemarker Lamps• Taillamps• License Plate Lamps• Instrument Panel Lights

Headlamps on ReminderA reminder tone sounds when the headlamps orparking lamps are manually turned on, if thedriver’s door is open and the ignition is in LOCKor ACC. To turn the tone off, turn the knob allthe way counterclockwise.In the automatic mode, the headlamps turn offonce the ignition key is in LOCK.

178

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional DRL are required on allvehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system makes the headlamps come onat reduced brightness when the followingconditions are met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamps knob is in automaticheadlamp mode.

• The light sensor detects daytime light.

• The transmission is not in PARK (P).

When the DRL are on, only the headlamps will beon. The taillamps, sidemarker and other lampswill not be on. The instrument panel will not be litup either.

When it begins to get dark, the headlampsautomatically switch from DRL to the regularheadlamps.

Automatic Headlamp SystemWhen it is dark enough outside, the AutomaticHeadlamp System turns on the headlamps whenthe vehicle is started and after the transaxlehas been shifted out of the PARK (P) position.The headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker, and parkinglamps will come on. The instrument panel lightsand radio lights will also turn on at normalbrightness. Once on, the system remains onduring these conditions even if the vehicleis shifted back into PARK (P).

The vehicle has a light sensor on the top of theinstrument panel. Make sure it is not covered or thesystem may come on whenever the ignition is onand the vehicle is shifted out of the PARK (P)position.

The system could also turn on the lamps whendriving through a parking garage, heavy overcastweather or a tunnel. This is normal.

179

There is a delay in the transition between thedaytime and nighttime operation of the DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlampsystems, so that driving under bridges or brightoverhead street lights does not affect the system.The DRL and automatic headlamp system are onlyaffected when the light sensor sees a change inlighting lasting longer than the delay.

If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, theautomatic headlamp system comes on after thetransmission is shifted out of PARK (P). Once youleave the garage, it will take about one minutefor the automatic headlamp system to change toDRL if it is light outside. During that delay, theinstrument panel cluster might not be as bright asusual. Make sure the instrument panel brightnesscontrol is in the full bright position.

If the vehicle is running and the automaticheadlamp system is already on, it can be turnedoff by turning and releasing the headlampcontrol at the off position. The automatic headlampsystem stays off until you turn and release theheadlamp control at the off position again.See Headlamps on page 178.

Fog LampsYour vehicle may have this feature. Use your foglamps for better vision in foggy or mistyconditions. Your ignition must be in RUN for yourfog lamps to work.

The fog lamp buttonis located on theinstrument panel tothe right of theexterior lamps knob.

Press the button to turn the fog lamps on. Pressthe button again to turn them off. A light willglow near the button while the fog lamps are on.Fog lamps will turn off whenever your high-beamheadlamps are on.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

180

Instrument Panel Brightness

Press the knob locatednext to the exteriorlamps knob to extend it.

Turn the knob to adjust the instrument panellights. Turn the knob all the way up to turn on theinterior lamps. Press the knob back into itsstored position when you are not using it.

Dome LampsThe dome lamps will come on when you open adoor unless the dome lamp override is pressed in.

Dome Lamp Override

The dome overridebutton is locatedbelow the exteriorlamps knob.

To turn the dome lamps off, press the button. Thedome lamps will remain off when a door is open.This will override the illuminated entry featureunless you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter to unlock the vehicle.

To return the lamps to automatic operation, pressthe button again. The dome lamps come onwhen a door is opened.

181

Entry LightingThe vehicle has entry lighting.

When any door is opened, the dome lamps comeon as long as the dome override lamp overridebutton is not pressed in. When all the doorsare closed, the lamps stay on for a short period oftime and then turn off automatically. If you usethe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitterto unlock the vehicle, the interior lamps come onfor a short time whether or not the dome lampoverride is on.

Exit LightingWith exit lighting, the interior lamps come on whenyou remove the key from the ignition. If thedome override is off, these lamps stay on for ashort period of time and then go out.

Reading LampsThe reading lamps are located in thefront console.

Press the lens on the lamps to turn the readinglamps on or off.

Electric Power ManagementThis vehicle has Electric Power Management(EPM), an advanced control system. It estimatesthe battery’s temperature and state of chargeand then adjusts the voltage for best performanceand extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, thevoltage is raised slightly to quickly put the chargeback in. When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage, you maysee the voltage move up or down. This is normal.If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged at idle if theelectrical loads are very high. This is true for allvehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough at idle toproduce all the power that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing loads are on: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger, climatecontrol fan at high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

182

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of thebattery. It does this by balancing the generator’soutput and the vehicle’s electrical needs. Itcan increase engine idle speed to generate morepower, whenever needed. It can temporarilyreduce the power demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,without being noticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action, this action maybe noticeable to the driver. If so, a DriverInformation Center (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as Battery Saver Active or BatteryVoltage Low. If this message is displayed, it isrecommended that the driver reduce the electricalloads as much as possible. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 220.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionThis feature shuts off the dome, courtesy, andvanity lamps if they are left on for more than20 minutes when the ignition is off. This will keepthe battery from running down.

If the battery run-down protection shuts off theinterior lamps, it may be necessary to do one ofthe following to return to normal operation:

• Shut off all lamps and close all doors.

• Turn the ignition key to RUN.

This feature will also turn off the parking lampsand headlamps under most circumstances, if theyare left on. If you would like to turn them backon, turn the exterior lamps knob.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)With the accessory power outlets, you can plug inauxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellulartelephone or CB radio.

Your vehicle has three accessory power outlets.There are two outlets located below the climatecontrols and one outlet is on the rear of the centerfloor console.

Remove the cover from the outlet to use theoutlet. Be sure to put the cover back on when notusing the accessory power outlet.

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adaptor fuses.

183

If you experience a problem, see your dealerfor additional information on the accessorypower outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not use equipment exceeding maximumamperage rating of 20 amperes. Check withyour dealer before adding electrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have this feature. The ashtray isremovable and fits into the front cupholder.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle. Neverput flammable items in the ashtray.

To remove the ashtray, pull the covered bin out ofthe cupholder.

To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and letgo. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it isheating will not allow the lighter to back awayfrom the heating element when it is hot. Damagefrom overheating may occur to the lighter orheating element, or a fuse could be blown. Donot hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating.Do not use equipment exceeding maximumamperage rating of 20 amperes.

184

Climate Controls

Dual Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling, and ventilation for your vehicle.

9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. If the knob is in off mode, outside airstill enters the vehicle, and is directed based onthe position of the mode knob. The temperaturecan still be adjusted using the temperature knob.

Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.

To change the current mode, select one ofthe following:

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of theair to the instrument panel outlets; then directsmost of the remaining air to the floor outlets. A littleair is directed toward the windshield and theside window outlets. Cooler air is directed to theupper vents and warmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of theair to the floor outlets with a little air directed tothe windshield and the side window outlets.The recirculation button cannot be selected whilein floor mode.

185

@ (Recirculation): Recirculation mode is usedto recirculate the air inside of your vehicle.When this button is pressed, an indicator light inthe button will come on to let you know that itis active. Use this mode to help prevent outsideodors and/or dust from entering your vehicle or tohelp cool the air inside of your vehicle morequickly. The air conditioning compressor will alsocome on when this mode is activated. While inrecirculation mode, the windows may fog when theweather is cold and damp. To clear the fog,select either the defog or defrost mode andincrease fan speed.

Defog and defrost modes are described later inthis section.

Driver’s Side Temperature Lever: The lever onthe left side of the climate control panel isused to raise or lower the temperature on thedriver’s side of the vehicle. Slide the lever up ordown to adjust the temperature.

Passenger’s Side Temperature Lever: The leveron the right side of the climate control panel isused to raise or lower the temperature onthe passenger’s side of the vehicle. Slide thelever up or down to adjust the temperature.This lever also adjusts the temperature to therear seat outlets.

When the temperature outside is 0°F (-18°C) orlower, use the engine coolant heater, if the vehiclehas one, to provide warmer air, faster to yourvehicle.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air-conditioning system on or off. Whenthe button is pressed, an indicator light will comeon and the system will begin to cool anddehumidify the air inside of the vehicle. You maynotice a slight change in engine performancewhen the air conditioning compressor shuts off andturns on again. This is normal.

186

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly. There aretwo modes to choose from to clear fog or frostfrom your windshield. Use the defog mode to clearthe windows of fog or moisture and warm thepassengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fogor frost from the windshield more quickly.

Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto select one of the following modes:

- (Defog): This mode directs the air to thefloor outlets, windshield and side window outlets.The recirculation button cannot be selectedwhile in defog mode.

1 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air tothe windshield and the side window outlets, withonly a little air directed to the floor outlets. The airconditioning compressor may run to dehumidifythe air to prevent window fogging. The recirculationbutton cannot be selected while in defrost mode.Do not drive the vehicle until all the windowsare clear.

Rear Window DefoggerIf your vehicle has the rear window defogger awarming grid is used to remove fog on therear window.

< (Rear): Press this button to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. An indicator light in thebutton will come on to let you know that therear window defogger is active. The rear windowdefogger will automatically turn off approximatelyten minutes after the button is pressed.

If your vehicle has heated mirrors, this button willactivate them.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,tape, a decal or anything similar to thedefogger grid.

187

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem

With this system you can control the heating,cooling and ventilation for your vehicle. When yourvehicle is first started and the climate controlsystem is on, or if the climate control system hasbeen turned on, the display will show thedriver’s temperature setting for five seconds.Then it will show the outside temperature.

9 (Off): Press this button to turn off the entireclimate control system. Outside air will still enter thevehicle, and will be directed to the floor. Press theAUTO button, the mode button, the fan arrows, oreither temperature knob to turn the system on.

C (Mode): Press this button to manually selectthe air delivery mode to the floor, instrument panel,or windshield outlets. The system will stay in theselected mode until the mode button is pressedagain or the AUTO button is pressed.

Driver’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this knobclockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower thetemperature on the driver’s side of the vehicle. Thedisplay will show the temperature settingdecreasing or increasing and an arrow pointingtoward the driver. This knob can also adjust thepassenger’s side temperature setting if thetwo are linked.

Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn thisknob clockwise or counterclockwise to manuallyraise or lower the temperature on the passenger’sside of the vehicle. The display will show thetemperature setting decreasing or increasing andan arrow pointing toward the passenger. Thepassenger’s temperature setting can be setto match and link to the driver’s temperaturesetting by pressing and holding the AUTO buttonfor three seconds. When adjusting the driver’sside temperature setting, the passenger’sside temperature setting will follow and botharrows will appear on the display.

188

The passenger’s side temperature setting alsoresets and relinks to the driver’s side temperaturesetting if the vehicle has been off for more thanthree hours.

Outside Air Temperature DisplayA new outside temperature reading will bedisplayed if the vehicle has been off for more thanthree hours. If the vehicle has been off for lessthan three hours, the old temperature reading maybe displayed because underhood heat isaffecting the true outside temperature. Underhoodheat can also affect the outside temperaturewhile the engine is running. It may also takeseveral minutes of driving before the displayupdates to the actual outside temperature.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operationis active, the system will control the insidetemperature, the air delivery mode, and thefan speed.

Use the steps below to place the entire system inautomatic mode:

1. Press the AUTO button.When AUTO is selected, the air conditioningoperation and air outlet mode will beautomatically controlled. The air conditioningcompressor will run continuously whenthe outside temperature is over approximately40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally beset to outside air. If it’s hot outside, the air inletwill automatically switch to recirculate insideair to help quickly cool down your vehicle.

2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.To find your comfort setting, start with a 72°F(22°C) temperature setting and allow about20 minutes for the system to adjust. Turn thedriver’s or passenger’s side temperature knobto adjust the temperature setting as necessary.If you choose the temperature setting of 60°F(15°C), the system will remain at the maximumcooling setting. If you choose the temperaturesetting of 90°F (32°C), the system will remain atthe maximum heat setting. Choosing eithermaximum setting may not cause the vehicle toheat or cool any faster.

189

Manual OperationTo change the current setting, select one of thefollowing:

w9x (Fan): This button allows you to manuallyadjust the fan speed. Press the up arrow toincrease fan speed and the down arrow todecrease fan speed. The display will change toshow you the selected fan speed and the driver’sside temperature setting for five seconds.

C (Mode): Press this button to manually changethe direction of the airflow in your vehicle. Keeppressing the button until the desired mode appearson the display. The display will change to showyou the selected air delivery mode and the driver’stemperature setting for five seconds.

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs approximatelyhalf of the air to the instrument panel outlets, thendirects the remaining air to the floor outlets. A littleair is directed toward the windshield and the sidewindow outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upperoutlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to thefloor outlets. Some air also comes out of thedefroster and side window outlets. The recirculationbutton cannot be selected in floor mode.

@ (Recirculation): Press this button to turnrecirculation mode on or off. When this button ispressed, an indicator light in the button willalso come on to let you know that it is activated.Recirculation mode is used to recirculate theair inside of your vehicle. Use this mode to helpprevent outside odors and/or dust from enteringyour vehicle or to help cool the air inside ofyour vehicle more quickly. Recirculation mode canbe used with vent and bi-level modes, but itcannot be used with floor, defog or defrost modes.Defog and defrost modes are described later inthis section.

If recirculation mode is selected with floor,defog, or defrost modes, the indicator will flashthree times and then turn off indicating theselection is not available.

You may also notice that the air conditioningcompressor will run while in recirculation mode.This is normal and will help to prevent fogging.

190

If the weather is cold and damp, the system maycause the windows to fog while using recirculationmode. If the windows do start to fog, selectdefog or defrost mode and increase fan speed.

Recirculation mode, if selected, will be clearedwhen the engine is turned off.

#A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button tomanually turn the air conditioning system on or off.When the system is on, the system willautomatically begin to cool and dehumidify the airinside of your vehicle. The air conditioningsymbol will appear on the display when the airconditioning is on and will turn off when theair conditioning is off.

If you turn the air conditioning off while in frontdefrost or defog mode, the air conditioning symbolwill turn off, however, the A/C compressor willremain on to help de-humidify the air insidethe vehicle. If one of the other modes is selectedthe compressor will then turn the A/C off untilit is selected again or the AUTO button is pressed.

To avoid fogging the inside glass on rainy andhumid days at a temperature above freezing, pressthe air conditioning button to run the A/Ccompressor. Also it is best to avoid the use of the

recirculation mode except when maximum airconditioning performance is needed or for shorttimes to avoid exterior odors.

You may notice a slight change in engineperformance when the air-conditioning compressorshuts off and turns on again. This is normal.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of the windows is a result ofmoisture condensing on the cool window glass.This can be reduced if the climate control system isused properly. You can use either defog or frontdefrost to clear fog or frost from your windshield.

- (Defog): Use this setting to clear the windowsof fog or moisture. This setting will deliver airto the floor and windshield outlets.

0 (Front Defrost): Press the front defrost buttonto clear the windshield and side windows offrost or fog quickly. The system will automaticallycontrol the fan speed if you select defrost fromAUTO mode. If the outside temperature is40°F (4°C) or warmer, your air conditioningcompressor will automatically run to helpdehumidify the air and dry the windshield. Do notdrive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

191

Rear Window DefoggerIf your vehicle has the rear window defogger awarming grid is used to remove fog from therear window.

< (Rear): Press this button to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off.

An indicator light in the button will come on to letyou know that the rear window defogger isactivated.

The rear window defogger will turn offapproximately 10 minutes after the button ispressed. If you need additional warming time,press the button again.

If your vehicle has heated mirrors, they will comeon when this button is pressed.

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rear window. Do notadhere anything to the defogger grid linesin the rear glass. These actions may damagethe rear defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the air outlets located in the center and on theside of the instrument panel to direct the airflow.

Operation Tips• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice,

snow, or any other obstruction, such asleaves. The heater and defroster will workbetter, reducing the chance of foggingthe inside of your windows.

• When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, setthe fan speed to maximum airflow for afew moments before driving. This helps clearthe intake ducts of snow and moisture,and reduces the chance of fogging the insideof your windows.

• Keep the air path under the front seats clearof objects. This helps air to circulatethroughout your vehicle.

• Adding outside equipment to the front of thevehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, mayaffect the performance of the heating and airconditioning system. Check with yourdealer before adding equipment to theoutside of your vehicle.

192

Rear Climate Control SystemYour vehicle has one of the following rear climatecontrol systems. With either of these systems,the rear climate controls will be disabled when thefront climate control system is in defrost. Thisoccurs to provide maximum airflow to clearthe windshield.

The temperature of the air coming through therear outlets is determined by the front passenger’stemperature setting. Use the mode knob tochange the direction of airflow (upper, bi-level orfloor) to the rear seat area.

PWR (Power): Press this button to turn the rearclimate controls on or off.

H (Panel): When panel mode is selected,the rear system will distribute air from thefour headliner outlets.

) (Bi-level): When bi-level mode is selected,the rear system will distribute air from thefour headliner outlets, the second seat side flooroutlets, and the third seat floor outlet.

6 (Floor): When floor mode is selected, the rearsystem will distribute air from the second seatside floor outlets and the third seat floor outlet.

193

If your vehicle has the rear seat audio system, thelower buttons are used to adjust the rear seatclimate control system. The temperature of the aircoming through the rear outlets is determinedby the front passenger’s temperature setting.

P (On/Off): Press this button to turn the rearclimate controls on or off.

z9 y (Fan): Press this button to adjust the fanspeed.

z\ y (Mode): Press this button to change thedirection of airflow (panel, bi-level or floor) tothe rear seat area.

The rear control will only turn on if the front is onand not in defrost mode.

194

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal thatsomething is wrong before it becomes seriousenough to cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to your warninglights and gages could also save you or othersfrom injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Asyou will see in the details on the next fewpages, some warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the engine just to let you know they’reworking. If you are familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to let youknow when there’s a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on when you are driving, or when one of thegages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do aboutit. Please follow this manual’s advice.

Waiting to do repairs can be costly—and evendangerous. So please get to know your warninglights and gages. They’re a big help.

Your vehicle may also have a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) that works along with the warninglights and gages. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 216.

195

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. Youwill know how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things youwill need to know to drive safely and economically.

United States Uplevel version shown, Canada, Base and SS Model similar

196

Speedometer and OdometerThe speedometer lets you see your speed inboth miles per hour (mph) and kilometers perhour (km/h).

The odometer shows how far your vehicle hasbeen driven, in either miles (used in the UnitedStates) or kilometers (used in Canada).

The odometer mileage can be checked without thevehicle running. Press the trip stem located onthe instrument panel cluster.

If your vehicle needs a new odometer installed,the new one will be set to the correct mileage totalof the old odometer.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can tell you how far yourvehicle has been driven since you last set the tripodometer to zero.

The odometer works together with the DriverInformation Center (DIC). You can set a Trip A andTrip B odometer. See “Trip Information” underDIC Operation and Displays on page 217.

The odometer mileage can be checked without thevehicle running. Press the trip stem on theinstrument panel cluster.

Tachometer

The tachometerdisplays the enginespeed in revolutionsper minute (rpm).

197

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, achime will sound for several seconds to remindyou buckle your safety belt. The driver safety beltlight will also come on and stay on for severalseconds, then it will flash for several more.You should buckle your seat belt.

This chime and light willbe repeated if the driverremains unbuckledand the vehicleis in motion.

If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime northe light will come on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to RUN orSTART, a chime will sound for several seconds toremind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. This would only occur if the passenger airbagis enabled. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 82 for more information. The passengersafety belt light will also come on and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.

This chime and light willbe repeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

198

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbag’s electricalsystem for malfunctions. The light tells you if thereis an electrical problem. The system checkincludes the airbag sensors, the airbag modules,the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System on page 71.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.

Then the light should go out. This means thesystem is ready.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. Ifthe light does not come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

199

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your rearview mirror has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or either the onor off symbol to let you know the status of theright front passenger’s frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate).

United States

Canada

200

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag. Achild in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.

If your vehicle has a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint, alabel on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facing child isso great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is failsafe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint,never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint inthe right front passenger seat the unlesspassenger airbag status indicator shows off. Neverput a rear facing child restraint in the right frontpassenger seat unless the airbag is off.

201

Here is why:

{CAUTION:


If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 82 for more on this,including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens,have the vehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size person sitting in theright front passenger seat may not havethe protection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 199.

202

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come on brieflywhen you turn on theignition, but the engine isnot running, as a checkto show you it is working.

It should go out once the engine is running. If itstays on, or comes on while you are driving,you may have a problem with the charging system.It could indicate that you have problems with agenerator drive belt, or another electrical problem.Have it checked right away. Driving while thislight is on could drain your battery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio and air conditioner.

Voltmeter Gage

When your engine is notrunning, but the ignitionis in RUN, this gagedisplays the batteryvoltage in DC volts.

When the engine is running, the gage shows thecondition of the charging system. The gagemay transition from a higher to lower or a lower tohigher reading. This is normal. Readingsbetween the low and high warning zones indicatethe normal operating range. The voltmetergage may also read lower when in fuel economymode. This is normal.

203

Readings in the low warning zone may occurwhen a large number of electrical accessories areoperating in the vehicle and the engine is leftidling for an extended period. This conditionis normal since the charging system is not able toprovide full power at engine idle. As enginespeeds are increased, this condition should correctitself as higher engine speeds allow the chargingsystem to create maximum power.

You can only drive for a short time with thereading in either warning zone. If you must drive,turn off all unnecessary accessories.

Readings in either warning zone indicate apossible problem in the electrical system. Havethe vehicle serviced as soon as possible.

Brake System Warning LightWhen the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will come on when you set your parkingbrake. The light will stay on if your parking brakedoes not release fully. If it stays on after yourparking brake is fully released, it means yourvehicle has a brake problem. A chime may alsosound when the light comes on.

Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there could be abrake problem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to RUN. If it does not comeon then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warnyou if there is a problem.

United States Canada

204

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may noticethat the pedal is harder to push or the pedal maygo closer to the floor. It may take longer tostop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towedfor service. See Towing Your Vehicle onpage 356.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

With the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), this lightwill come on when youstart your engine andmay stay on for severalseconds, that is normal.

A chime may also sound when the light comes on.

If the light stays on, or comes on when you aredriving, your vehicle needs service. If the regularbrake system warning light is not on, you still havebrakes, but you do not have anti-lock brakes. If theregular brake system warning light is also on, youdo not have anti-lock brakes and there is a problemwith your regular brakes. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 204 earlier in this section.

The ABS warning light should come on brieflywhen you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the lightdoes not come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

205

StabiliTrak® Service Light

This light will come onbriefly when the engineis started.

This light will come on if a problem is detected inthe StabiliTrak® system.

For more information see StabiliTrak® System onpage 307.

StabiliTrak® Indicator Light

This warning lightshould come onbriefly when theengine is started.

During most driving conditions, this light will notcome on. If the StabiliTrak® System is activelycontrolling the stability and/or traction of thevehicle, this light will flash. This is normal.

This light will come on if any portion of the systemhas been manually turned off or a problem isdetected in the system.

If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center, amessage will appear also, see DIC Warningsand Messages on page 220 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 307 for more information.

206

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.If the gage pointer moves into the red area, itmeans that your engine coolant has overheated. Ifyou have been operating your vehicle undernormal driving conditions, you should pull off theroad, stop your vehicle and turn off the engineas soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 414 for moreinformation.

Tire Pressure Light

This light will come onbriefly when you turnthe ignition to RUN.

This light will also come on when one or more ofyour tires are significantly underinflated.

If your vehicle has a Driver InformationCenter (DIC), a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE DICmessage will accompany the light, see DICWarnings and Messages on page 220.

Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe todo so. If underinflated, inflate to the properpressure. See Tires on page 443 for moreinformation.


207

This light will flash for approximately 70 secondsand then turn on solid if a problem is detected withthe Tire Pressure Monitor system.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 455for more information.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operationof the fuel, ignition,and emissioncontrol systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended toassure that emissions are at acceptable levels forthe life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment. The check engine light comes on toindicate that there is a problem and service isrequired. Malfunctions often will be indicated bythe system before any problem is apparent.

This may prevent more serious damage to yourvehicle. This system is also designed to assist yourservice technician in correctly diagnosing anymalfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered byyour warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 382.

208

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosisand service may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected onyour vehicle. Diagnosis and service maybe required.

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amountof cargo being hauled as soon as it ispossible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for service assoon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 387.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. Aloose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.

209

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 384. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down. The diagnostic system is designed toevaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspection forlack of OBD system readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.

210

Oil Pressure Gage

The oil pressure gage shows the engine oilpressure in psi (pounds per square inch) when theengine is running. Canadian vehicles indicatepressure in kPa (kilopascals).

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or others couldbe burned. Check your oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outsidetemperature and oil viscosity, but readingsabove the low pressure zone indicate the normaloperating range.

A reading in the low pressure zone may becaused by a dangerously low oil level or otherproblems causing low oil pressure.


211

Change Engine Oil Light

Your vehicle mayhave a changeengine oil light.

When this light comes on it means that an oilchange and other maintenance proceduresare required for your vehicle.

See Scheduled Maintenance on page 517 andEngine Oil on page 398 for more information.

Once the engine oil has been changed, the changeengine oil light must be reset. Until it is reset,the light will stay on when the engine is on.

Security Light

This light will come onbriefly when you turnthe key toward START.

The light will stay on until the engine starts. If thelight flashes, the Passlock® system has entereda tamper mode. If the vehicle fails to start,see Passlock® on page 111.

If the light comes on continuously while drivingand stays on, there may be a problem withthe Passlock® system. Your vehicle will not beprotected by Passlock®, and you should seeyour dealer.

Also, see Content Theft-Deterrent on page 110 foradditional information regarding the security light.

212

Cruise Control Light

If your vehicle has aDriver InformationCenter (DIC), this lightwill come on whenthe cruise control is set.

See Cruise Control on page 174 and DICWarnings and Messages on page 220 for moreinformation.

Reduced Engine Power Light

This light comes onwhen a noticeablereduction in the vehicle’sperformance occurs.

The vehicle can be driven at a reduced speedwhen the reduced engine power light is on,but acceleration and speed may be reduced.

The performance may be reduced until the nexttime you drive your vehicle. If this light stayson, see your dealer as soon as possible fordiagnosis and repair.

This light may also come on if there is a problemwith the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)system. If this happens, take the vehicle in forservice as soon as possible.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 172.

213

Service Four-Wheel DriveWarning Light

This light should comeon briefly when you turnon the ignition, as acheck to show youit is working.

The service four-wheel drive light comes on,except for the SS model, to indicate that there maybe a problem with the drive system and serviceis required. Malfunctions can be indicated bythe system before any problem is apparent, whichmay prevent serious damage to the vehicle.This system is also designed to assist yourGM dealer in correctly diagnosing a malfunction.

Check Gages Warning Light

The check gages lightwill come on brieflywhen you are startingthe engine.

If the light comes on and stays on while you aredriving, check your coolant temperature andengine oil pressure gages to see if they are in thewarning zones.

Gate Ajar Light

If this light comes on,the liftgate or liftglass isnot completely shut.

Close the liftgate or liftglass. Never drive with theliftgate or liftglass even partially open.

214

Fuel Gage

When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells youabout how much fuel you have remaining.

Here are four things that some owners ask about.None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:

• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe gage indicated. For example, the gage mayhave indicated the tank was half full, but itactually took a little more or less than half thetank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The gage moves a little when you turn a corneror speed up.

• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when youturn off the ignition.

Low Fuel Warning LightThe light next to the fuel gage will come on brieflywhen you are starting the engine.

This light comes on when the fuel tank is low onfuel. To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank.

Check Gas Cap Light

If your vehicle has thislight, it will come on ifyour gas cap is notsecurely fastened.

See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 208 formore information.


215

Driver Information Center (DIC)Your vehicle may have this feature. The DriverInformation Center (DIC) display is located on theinstrument panel cluster, below the speedometer. Ifyour vehicle has DIC buttons, they are located onthe steering wheel. The DIC can display informationsuch as the trip odometer, fuel economy,customization features, and warning/statusmessages.

If your vehicle does not have DIC steering wheelbuttons, you will not have all of the featureslisted. Scroll through the odometer and tripodometer by pressing the trip odometer reset stemlocated on the instrument panel cluster. Turnoff, or acknowledge, DIC messages by pressingthe trip odometer reset stem. See Speedometerand Odometer on page 197 for informationon features for vehicles without DIC buttons.

3 (Trip Information): Press this button todisplay the odometer, trip odometers, tire pressurefor vehicles with a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, and timer.

t (Fuel Information): Press this button todisplay the current range, fuel used, average fueleconomy, and engine oil life.

216

4 (Customization): Press this button to accessthe vehicle settings menu and customize thepersonal settings on your vehicle.

r (Select): Press this button to reset certainDIC functions and set your customization settings.Pressing any of the DIC buttons will acknowledgeDIC messages and clear them from the DICdisplay.

DIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After ashort delay the DIC will display the informationthat was last displayed before the enginewas turned off.If a problem is detected, a warning message willappear on the display. Pressing the trip stemwill acknowledge any warning or servicemessages. Pressing any of the DIC steering wheelbuttons — trip information, fuel information,customization, or select button — will alsoacknowledge any warnings or service messages.

You should take any message that appears onthe display seriously and remember that clearingthe message will only make the messagedisappear, not correct the problem.

The DIC has different modes which can beaccessed by pressing the four DIC buttons locatedon the steering wheel. These buttons are tripinformation, fuel information, customization, andselect. The button functions are detailed inthe following pages.

Trip Information Button

3 (Trip Information): Press the tripinformation button to scroll through theODOMETER, TRIP A, TRIP B, TIREPRESSURES, and TIMER.

Odometer: Press the trip information button untilODOMETER appears on the display. Thismode shows the total distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either miles or kilometers. Pressingthe reset stem located on the instrument clusterwith the vehicle off will also display the odometer.

Trip A: Press the trip information button untilTRIP A appears on the display. This mode showsthe current distance traveled since the lastreset for TRIP A in either miles or kilometers.

217

Trip B: Press the trip information button untilTRIP B appears on the display. This mode showsthe current distance traveled since the lastreset for TRIP B in either miles or kilometers.

To reset TRIP A or TRIP B information, press andhold the select button for one second while inone of the trip modes. This will reset theinformation for TRIP A or TRIP B.

You can also reset the TRIP A or TRIP B while theyare displayed by pressing the reset stem on thecluster. If you press and hold the reset stem or theselect button for more than four seconds, thedisplay will show the distance traveled since the lastignition cycle for TRIP A or TRIP B.

Tire Pressures: Press the trip information buttonuntil TIRE PRESSURES appears on the display.This mode shows the tire pressure in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Pressthe select button to scroll through the followinginformation:

• LF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the frontdriver’s side tire.

• RF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the frontpassenger’s side tire.

• LR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the reardriver’s side tire.

• RR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the rearpassenger’s side tire.

Timer: The DIC can be used as a timer. Pressthe select button while TIMER is displayed to startthe timer. The display will show the amount oftime that has passed since the timer waslast reset, not including time the ignition is off.Time will continue to be counted as long asthe ignition is on, even if another display is beingshown on the DIC. The timer will record up to99 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59)after which the display will roll back to zero.

To stop the counting of time, press the selectbutton briefly while TIMER is displayed.

To reset the timer to zero, press and hold theselect button while TIMER is displayed.

Fuel Information Button

t (Fuel Information): Press the fuel informationbutton to scroll through the range, fuel used,average fuel economy, and the engine oillife system.

218

Fuel Range: Press the fuel information buttonuntil RANGE appears on the display. Thismode shows the remaining distance you can drivewithout refueling. It is based on fuel economyand the fuel remaining in the fuel tank. The displaywill show LOW if the fuel level is low.

The fuel economy data used to determine fuelrange is an average of recent driving conditions.As your driving conditions change, this data isgradually updated. Fuel range cannot be reset.

Fuel Used: Press the fuel information button untilFUEL USED appears on the display. This modeshows the number of gallons or liters of fuel usedsince the last reset of this menu item. To reset thefuel used information, press and hold the selectbutton for one second while FUEL USED isdisplayed.

Average Fuel Economy: Press the fuelinformation button until AVG. ECON appears onthe display. This mode shows how many miles pergallon (MPG), liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km),or kilometers per liter (km/L) your vehicle isgetting based on current and past drivingconditions.

Press and hold the select button for one secondwhile AVG. ECON is displayed to reset theaverage fuel economy. Average fuel economy willthen be calculated starting from that point. Ifthe average fuel economy is not reset, it will becontinually updated each time you drive.

Engine Oil Life System: Press the fuelinformation button until ENGINE OIL LIFE appearson the display. The engine oil life system showsan estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. It willshow 100% when the system is reset after anoil change. It will alert you to change your oil on aschedule consistent with your driving conditions.

Always reset the engine oil life system after an oilchange. To reset the engine oil life system, seeEngine Oil Life System on page 404.

In addition to the engine oil life system monitoringthe oil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the Maintenance Schedule in thismanual. See Engine Oil on page 398 andScheduled Maintenance on page 517.

219

Customization Button

4 (Customization): Press the customizationbutton to access the VEHICLE SETTINGS menuand customize the settings to your vehicle.See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 226 formore information.

Select Button

r (Select): Press the select button to resetcertain DIC functions, turn off or acknowledgemessages on the DIC display, and set yourcustomization settings. For example, this buttonwill allow you to reset the trip odometers, turnoff the FUEL LEVEL LOW message, and enablesyou to scroll through and select the languagein which the DIC information will appear.

DIC Warnings and MessagesMessages are displayed on the DIC to notify thedriver that the status of the vehicle has changedand that some action may be needed to correctthe condition. Multiple messages may appearone after another.

Some messages may not require immediateaction. Press any of the DIC buttons on thesteering wheel or the trip odometer reset stem onthe instrument panel cluster to acknowledgethat you received the messages and to clear themfrom the display.

Some messages cannot be cleared from thedisplay because they are more urgent. Thesemessages require action before they can beremoved from the DIC display. Take any messagesthat appear on the display seriously and rememberthat clearing the messages will only make themessages disappear, not correct the problem.

The following are the possible messages that canbe displayed and some information about them.

CHANGE ENGINE OILThis message displays when the engine oil needsto be changed and service is required for yourvehicle. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 517and Engine Oil on page 398 for more information.Also see Engine Oil Life System on page 404for information on how to reset the message. Thismessage clears itself after 10 seconds until thenext ignition cycle.

220

CHECK TIRE PRESSUREThis message displays when the tire pressure inone of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.Press any of the DIC buttons, or the trip stem, toacknowledge this message and clear it fromthe DIC display.

If this message appears on the DIC, stop as soonas you can. Have the tire pressures checkedand set to those shown on the Tire LoadingInformation Label. See Tires on page 443, LoadingYour Vehicle on page 350, and Inflation - TirePressure on page 452. If the tire pressure is low,the low tire pressure warning light comes on.See Tire Pressure Light on page 207.

CHECK WASHER FLUIDThis message displays if the washer fluid level islow. Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir clears this message. SeeWindshield Washer Fluid on page 423. Thismessage clears itself after 10 seconds, or you canpress any of the DIC buttons, or the trip stem,to acknowledge this message and clear it from theDIC display.

CURB VIEW ACTIVATEDThis message displays when the passengeroutside rearview mirror moves into the curb viewposition. See Outside Curb View Assist Mirroron page 144 for more information.

DRIVER DOOR AJARThis message displays and a chime sounds if thedriver’s door is not fully closed. Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, andclose the door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC. Press any ofthe DIC buttons, or the trip stem, to acknowledgethis message and clear it from the DIC display.

221

ENGINE COOLANT HOT/ENGINEOVERHEATED

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Donot increase the engine speed above normalidling speed. See Engine Overheating onpage 414 for more information.

This message displays and a chime sounds if thecooling system temperature gets hot. SeeEngine Overheating on page 414 for the propercourse of action. This message clears whenthe coolant temperature drops to a safe operatingtemperature.

FUEL LEVEL LOWThis message displays and a chime sounds if thefuel level is low in the vehicle’s fuel tank. Refuel assoon as possible. Press any of the DIC buttons, orthe trip stem, to acknowledge this message andclear it from the DIC display. See Low Fuel WarningLight on page 215, Filling the Tank on page 387,and Fuel on page 384 for more information.

ICE POSSIBLEThis message may display if the outsidetemperature reaches a level where ice could formon the roadway. If the temperature rises to a safelevel, the message clears. This message clearsitself after 10 seconds, or you can press any of theDIC buttons, or the trip stem, to acknowledge thismessage and clear it from the DIC display.

KEY FOB # BATTERY LOWThis message displays if a Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replacethe battery in the transmitter. See “BatteryReplacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 98. Press any of theDIC buttons, or the trip stem, to acknowledge thismessage and clear it from the DIC display.

222

LEFT REAR DOOR AJARThis message displays and a chime sounds if thedriver’s side rear door is not fully closed. Stop andturn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions,and close the door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC. Press any of theDIC buttons, or the trip stem, to acknowledge thismessage and clear it from the DIC display.

OIL PRESSURE LOW/STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle whilethe engine oil pressure is low, severe enginedamage may occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon aspossible. Do not drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure is corrected. SeeEngine Oil on page 398 for more information.

This message displays if low oil pressure levelsoccur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the cause of the low oilpressure has been corrected. Check the oil as soonas possible and have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer. See Engine Oil on page 398.

PASSENGER DOOR AJARThis message displays and a chime sounds if thepassenger’s door is not fully closed. Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, andclose the door again. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC. Press any of the DICbuttons, or the trip stem, to acknowledge thismessage and clear it from the DIC display.

REAR ACCESS OPENThis message displays and a chime sounds if theliftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition isin RUN. Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgateand liftglass. See Liftgate/Liftglass on page 106.Restart the vehicle and check for the message onthe DIC display. Press any of the DIC buttons,or the trip stem, to acknowledge this message andclear it from the DIC display.

223

RIGHT REAR DOOR AJARThis message displays and a chime sounds if thepassenger’s side rear door is not fully closed.Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the door again. Checkto see if the message still appears on theDIC. Press any of the DIC buttons, or the tripstem, to acknowledge this message and clear itfrom the DIC display.

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays if there is a problem withthe airbag system. Have your dealer inspectthe system for problems. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 199 and Airbag System on page 71for more information. Press any of the DICbuttons, or the trip stem, to acknowledge thismessage and clear it from the DIC display.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMThis message displays if a problem occurs withthe brake system. If this message appears, stop assoon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restartthe vehicle and check for the message on theDIC display. If the message is still displayed, orappears again when you begin driving, thebrake system needs service. See your dealer.

SERVICE CHARGING SYS (System)This message displays if there is a problem with thebattery charging system. Under certain conditions,the charging system light may also turn on in theinstrument panel cluster. See Charging SystemLight on page 203. The battery will not be chargingat an optimal rate and the vehicle will lose the abilityto enter the fuel economy mode. The vehicle is safeto drive, however you should have the electricalsystem checked by your dealer. Press any of theDIC buttons, or the trip stem, to acknowledge thismessage and clear it from the DIC display.

SERVICE STABILITRAKIf this message displays, it means there may be aproblem with the StabiliTrak® system. If thismessage appears, try to reset the system byperforming the following: stop; turn off the engine;then start the engine again. If this message stillcomes on, it means there is a problem. You shouldsee your dealer for service. The vehicle is safeto drive, however, you do not have the benefit ofStabiliTrak®, so reduce your speed and driveaccordingly. Press any of the DIC buttons, or thetrip stem, to acknowledge this message andclear it from the DIC display.

224

SERVICE TIRE MONITORThis message displays if a part on the TirePressure Monitor (TPM) system is not workingproperly. If you drive your vehicle while any of thefour sensors are missing or inoperable, thewarning comes on in about 20 minutes. A sensorwould be missing, for example, if you putdifferent wheels on your vehicle withouttransferring the sensors. If the warning comes onand stays on, there may be a problem with theTPM. See your dealer.

STABILITRAK ACTIVEThis message displays anytime the StabiliTrak®

system activates to maintain vehicle stability.Any combination of engine speed management,brake traction control, and stability control displaysthis message.

STABILITRAK NOT READYThis message may display if driving conditionsdelay StabiliTrak® system initialization. Thisis normal. Once the system initializes, thismessage will no longer be displayed on the DIC.

STABILITRAK OFFThis message displays when you press theStabiliTrak® button for more than five seconds orwhen stability control has been automaticallydisabled. The StabiliTrak® button is located on thetransmission shift handle. To limit wheel spin andrealize the full benefits of the stability enhancementsystem, you should normally leave StabiliTrak® on.However, you should turn StabiliTrak® off if yourvehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow andyou want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it, orif you are driving in extreme off-road conditions andrequire more wheel spin. See If Your Vehicle isStuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 348. Toturn the StabiliTrak® system back on, press theStabiliTrak® button again.There are several conditions that can cause thismessage to appear.• The message may display if the brake system

warning light is on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 204.

• The message displays if the vehicle is shiftedinto 4LO.

The message turns off as soon as the conditionsthat caused the message to be displayed areno longer present.

225

TIGHTEN FUEL CAPThis message may display and a chime may soundif the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly.Fully reinstall the fuel cap. See Filling the Tank onpage 387. The diagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporateinto the atmosphere. This message remains on untilit is acknowledged and cleared from the DIC displayby pressing any of the DIC buttons or the trip stem.The DIC message is also cancelled if the ignition isturned off.The DIC message and the Service Engine Soonlight may come on again during a second trip ifthe fuel cap is still not tightened properly. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 208 formore information.

TRACTION CONTROL OFFThis message displays when you momentarilypress the StabiliTrak® button located on thetransmission shift handle. In this mode, stabilitycontrol and the brake-traction control arefunctional. Engine speed management will bemodified and the driven wheels can spin morefreely. For more details on this mode, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 307.

TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays and a chime sounds if aturn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km).Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the offposition. Press any of the DIC buttons, or thetrip stem, to acknowledge this message and clearit from the DIC display.

DIC Vehicle CustomizationYour vehicle may have customization capabilitiesthat allow you to program some features toone setting based on your preference. All of thecustomizable options listed may not be availableon your vehicle. Only the options available displayon the Driver Information Center (DIC).

The default settings for the customization featureswere set when your vehicle left the factory, butmay have been changed from their defaultstate since then.

To change feature preferences, make sure theignition is on and the vehicle is in PARK (P). Toavoid excessive drain on the battery, it isrecommended that the headlamps are turned off.

226

Press the customization button to scroll throughthe available customizable options.

After pressing the customization button, VEHICLESETTINGS momentarily displays before goingto a customization option.

Lock DoorsPress the customization button until LOCKDOORS: IN GEAR appears in the display. Toselect your preference for automatic locking, pressthe select button while LOCK DOORS: IN GEARis displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select buttonwill scroll through the following choices:

LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR (default): The doorswill lock when the vehicle is shifted out ofPARK (P).

LOCK DOORS: WITH SPEED: The doors willlock when the vehicle speed is above8 mph (13 km/h) for three seconds.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it and move on to the next feature.For more information on automatic door locks, seeProgrammable Automatic Door Locks onpage 102.

Unlock DoorsPress the customization button until UNLOCKDOORS: IN PARK appears in the display. To selectyour preference for automatic unlocking, press theselect button while UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK isdisplayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button willscroll through the following choices:

UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK (default): All of thedoors will unlock when the vehicle is shiftedinto PARK (P).

UNLOCK DRIVER: IN PARK: The driver’s doorwill be unlocked when the vehicle is shiftedinto PARK (P).

UNLOCK DOORS: KEY OUT: All of the doorswill unlock when the key is taken out of theignition.

UNLOCK DOORS: MANUALLY: The doors willnot be unlocked automatically.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it and move on to the next feature.For more information on automatic door locks, seeProgrammable Automatic Door Locks onpage 102.

227

Lock FeedbackPress the customization button until LOCKFEEDBACK: BOTH appears in the display. Toselect your preference for the feedback youreceive when locking the vehicle with the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, press theselect button while LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH isdisplayed on the DIC. Pressing the selectbutton will scroll through the following choices:

LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parkinglamps will flash each time you press the buttonwith the lock symbol on the RKE transmitterand the horn will chirp the second time you pressthe lock button.

LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be nofeedback when locking the vehicle.

LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lampswill flash each time you press the button withthe lock symbol on the RKE transmitter.

LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirpthe second time you press the button with the locksymbol on the RKE transmitter.Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it and move on to the next feature.

Unlock FeedbackPress the customization button until UNLOCKFEEDBACK: LAMPS appears in the display. Toselect your preference for the feedback you willreceive when unlocking the vehicle with the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, press the selectbutton while UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS isdisplayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button willscroll through the following choices:UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default): Theparking lamps will flash each time you press thebutton with the unlock symbol on the RKEtransmitter.

UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn willchirp the second time you press the button with theunlock symbol on the RKE transmitter.

UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH: The parkinglamps will flash each time you press the buttonwith the unlock symbol on the RKE transmitter andthe horn will chirp the second time you pressthe unlock button.

UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be nofeedback when unlocking the vehicle.Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it and move on to the next feature.

228

Headlamp DelayPress the customization button until HEADLAMPDELAY: 10 SEC appears in the display. To selectyour preference for how long the headlamps willstay on when you turn off the vehicle, press theselect button while HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC isdisplayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button willscroll through the following choices:

• HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (Seconds)(default)

• HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC

• HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC

• HEADLAMP DELAY: 1 MIN (Minute)

• HEADLAMP DELAY: 2 MIN

• HEADLAMP DELAY: 3 MIN

• HEADLAMP DELAY: OFF

The amount of time you choose will be the amountof time that the headlamps stay on after you turn offthe vehicle. If you choose OFF, the headlamps willturn off as soon as you turn off the vehicle.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it and move on to the next feature.

Perimeter LightsPress the customization button until PERIMETERLIGHTS: ON appears in the display. To selectyour preference for perimeter lighting, pressthe select button while PERIMETER LIGHTS: ONis displayed on the DIC. Pressing the selectbutton will scroll through the following choices:

PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON (default): Theheadlamps and back-up lamps will come on for40 seconds, if it is dark enough outside, when youunlock the vehicle with the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

PERIMETER LIGHTS: OFF: The perimeter lightswill not come on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.


229

Easy Exit SeatPress the customization button until EASY EXITSEAT: OFF appears in the display. To select yourpreference for seat position exit, press theselect button while EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF isdisplayed on the DIC. Pressing the select buttonwill scroll through the following choices:

EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default): No seat exitrecall will occur.

EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: The driver’s seat willmove to the exit position when the key is removedfrom the ignition.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it and move on to the next feature.For more information on seat position exit,see “Easy Exit Seat” under Memory Seat, Mirrors,and Pedals on page 11.

Seat RecallPress the customization button until SEATRECALL: OFF appears in the display. To selectyour preference for recall of the driver’s memoryseat, mirrors, and adjustable pedals, if your vehicle

has this feature, press the select button whileSEAT RECALL: OFF is displayed on theDIC. Pressing the select button will scroll throughthe following choices:

SEAT RECALL: OFF (default): The driver’smemory seat, mirrors, and adjustable pedalsposition you saved will only be recalled when thememory button 1 or 2 is pressed.

SEAT RECALL: AT KEY IN: The driver’smemory seat, mirrors, and adjustable pedalsposition you saved will be recalled when you putthe key in the ignition.

SEAT RECALL: ON REMOTE: The driver’smemory seat, mirrors, and adjustable pedalsposition you saved will be recalled whenyou unlock the vehicle with the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it and move on to the next feature.For more information on the memory seatfeature, see Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedalson page 11.

230

Curb ViewPress the customization button until CURB VIEW:OFF appears in the display. To select yourpreference for curb view, press the select buttonwhile CURB VIEW: OFF is displayed on theDIC. Pressing the select button will scroll throughthe following choices:

CURB VIEW: OFF (default): The passenger’soutside mirror will not be tilted down whenthe vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).

CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: The passenger’soutside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicleis shifted into REVERSE (R).

When the vehicle is placed in PARK (P) or in anyforward gear, the mirror will return to the normaldriving position, following a short delay.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it and move on to the next feature.For more information on tilt mirror in reverse,see Outside Curb View Assist Mirror on page 144.

Alarm WarningPress the customization button until ALARMWARNING: BOTH appears in the display. Toselect your preference for alarm warning, press theselect button while ALARM WARNING: BOTH isdisplayed on the DIC. Pressing the selectbutton will scroll through the following choices:

ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): Theheadlamps will flash and the horn will chirp whenthe alarm is active.

ALARM WARNING: HORN: The horn will chirpwhen the alarm is active.

ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps willflash when the alarm is active.

ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarmwarning on activation.

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while your choice isdisplayed on the DIC to select it and move on tothe next feature. For more information onalarm warning type, see Content Theft-Deterrenton page 110.

231

LanguagePress the customization button until LANGUAGE:ENGLISH appears in the display. To selectyour preference for display language, press theselect button while LANGUAGE: ENGLISHis displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select buttonwill scroll through the following languages:

• ENGLISH (default)

• FRANCAIS (French)

• ESPANOL (Spanish)


If you accidentally choose a language that youdo not want or understand, press andhold the customization button and the tripinformation button at the same time. The DICwill begin scrolling through the languagesin their particular language. English will bein English, Francais will be in French, andEspanol will be in Spanish. When you seethe language that you would like, release bothbuttons. The DIC will then display theinformation in the language you chose.

You can also scroll through the differentlanguages by pressing and holding the trip resetstem for four seconds, as long as you are inthe odometer mode.

232

UnitsPress the customization button until UNITS: U.S.(ENGLISH) appears in the display. To selectEnglish or metric, press the select button whileUNITS: U.S. (ENGLISH) is displayed on the DIC.Pressing the select button will scroll throughthe following choices:

• UNITS: U.S. (ENGLISH) (default)

• UNITS: METRIC (km/L)

• UNITS: METRIC (L/100 km)

If U.S. (ENGLISH) is chosen, all information willbe displayed in English units. For example,distance will be displayed in miles (mi) and fuel

economy in miles per gallon (MPG). If METRIC(km/L) is chosen, all information will be displayedin metric units. For example, distance will bedisplayed in kilometers (km) and fuel economy inkilometers per liter (km/L). If METRIC (L/100 km)is chosen, all information will be displayed in metricunits. For example, distance will be displayed inkilometers (km) and fuel economy in liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km).

Choose one of the available options and press thecustomization button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it and exit out of the customizableoptions.

233

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 300. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone, and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. Here are some ways in which you canhelp avoid distraction while driving.

234

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system,CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,or two-way radio, make sure that it can beadded by checking with your dealer. Also,check federal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If sound equipment can beadded, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment may interfere with theoperation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, orother systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that hasbeen added.

Notice: The chime signals related to safetybelts, parking brake, and other functions ofyour vehicle operate through the radio/entertainment system. If that equipment isreplaced or additional equipment is added toyour vehicle, the chimes may not work. Makesure that replacement or additional equipmentis compatible with your vehicle before installingit. See Accessories and Modifications onpage 382.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignition isturned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 114 for more information.

235

Setting the TimeThe radio may have a button marked with anH or HR to represent hours and an M or MN torepresent minutes.

Press and hold the hour button until the correcthour appears on the display. AM or PM will appearon the display for morning or evening hours.Press and hold the minute button until the correctminute appears on the display. The time canbe set with the ignition on or off.

To synchronize the time with an FM stationbroadcasting Radio Data System (RDS)information, press and hold the hour and minutebuttons at the same time until UPDATED andthe clock symbol appear on the display. If the timeis not available from the station, NO UPDAT willappear on the display.

RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuningto an RDS broadcast station, it may take a fewminutes for the time to update.

Radio with CD (Base)

If your vehicle has the Bose® audio system, yourvehicle has six Bose® amplified speakers.

Base Radio Shown, Bose® Similar

236

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selectedtype of programming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. In rare cases, aradio station can broadcast incorrect informationthat causes the radio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters display instead of thefrequency. RDS stations can also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the programbeing broadcast.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the systemon and off.

o VOL p (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or to decrease thevolume.

INFO (Information): When the ignition is off,press this knob to display the time.

237

For RDS, press the INFO knob to change whatappears on the display while using RDS. Thedisplay options are station name, RDS stationfrequency, PTY (program type), and the name ofthe program (if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knobwhile in XM™ mode to retrieve four differentcategories of information related to the currentsong or channel: Artist, Song Title, Categoryor PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press theINFO knob until you see the desired display, thenpress and hold the knob until a beep sounds.The selected display becomes the default.

AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system adjusts automaticallyto make up for road and wind noise as you driveby increasing the volume as vehicle speedincreases.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press thisbutton to select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOLdisplays. Each higher setting provides morevolume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.To turn automatic volume off, press this buttonuntil AVOL OFF displays.

Finding a StationBAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Thedisplay shows the selection.

TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

©SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or the TYPEarrows to go to the next or to the previousstation and stay there.The radio only seeks stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

©SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN orthe TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCANdisplays and a beep sounds. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds, then goes tothe next station. Press either the SCAN orthe TYPE arrows again to stop scanning.To scan preset stations, press and hold eitherthe SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more thanfour seconds. PSCN displays and a double beepsounds. The radio goes to a preset station,plays for a few seconds, then goes to the nextpreset station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPEarrows again to stop scanning presets.The radio only scans stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

238

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped), can beprogramed on the six numbered pushbuttons, byperforming the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1or XM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed, thestation that was set, returns.

5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for eachpushbutton.

To store an equalization setting to a preset stationperform the following:

1. Tune to the preset station.

2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button toselect the equalization setting.Once the equalization no longer displays, theequalization is set for that preset station.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob untilBASS, MID (midrange) (without Bose®), or TREB(treble) displays. Turn the knob to increase or todecrease the tone. The display shows the bass,midrange (without Bose®), or treble level. If astation is weak or has static, decrease the treble.

To adjust the bass, midrange (without Bose®),or treble to the middle position while it is displayed,push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio producesone beep and adjusts the display level to the middleposition.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knobwhen no tone or speaker control is displayed. ALLCENTERED displays, a beep sounds, and thedisplay level adjusts to the middle position.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press thisbutton to select customized equalization settingsdesigned for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock,and classical. Selecting CUSTOM or adjusting thetone controls, returns the EQ to the manual mode.

239

The radio saves separate AUTO EQ settings foreach preset and source.

If the radio has the Bose® audio system, the AUTOEQ settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between theright and the left speakers, push and release theAUDIO knob until BAL (balance) displays.Turn the knob to move the sound toward the rightor the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, push and release the AUDIO knobuntil FADE displays. Turn the knob to move thesound toward the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance or fade to the middle positionwhile it is displayed, push the AUDIO knob and holdit until the radio produces one beep. The balance orfade adjusts to the middle position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knobwhen no tone or speaker control displays. ALLCENTERED displays, a beep sounds, and thedisplay level adjusts to the middle position.

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY performthe following:

1. Press the TYPE button to activate programtype select mode. TYPE and a PTY displays.

2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release theTYPE button to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press andrelease either the TYPE or the SEEK arrowsto select and to take you to the PTY’s firststation.

4. To go to another station within that PTY,press the TYPE button then, press eitherthe TYPE or the SEEK arrows once.

5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrowstwice to exit program type select mode.

If the radio cannot find the desired program type,NONE displays and the radio returns to thelast station you were listening to.

240

SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY byperforming the following:

1. Press the TYPE button to activate programtype select mode. TYPE and the last selectedPTY displays.


3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press andhold either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows fortwo seconds, and the radio begins to scanthe stations in the PTY.

4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows tostop scanning.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternatefrequency lets the radio switch to a strongerstation with the same program type. To turnalternate frequency on, press and hold BAND fortwo seconds. AF ON displays. The radio canswitch to stations with a stronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and holdBAND again for two seconds. AF OFF displays.The radio does not switch to other stations.

This function does not apply for XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)These buttons have factory PTY presets. Up to12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons, byperforming the following steps:

1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.

2. Press the TYPE button to activate programtype select mode. TYPE and the last selectedPTY displays.


4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. When thatnumbered pushbutton is pressed (while inprogram type mode), the PTY that wasset, returns.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

241

RDS Messages

INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, the information symbol displays.Press this button to see the message. Themessage can display the artist, song title, call inphone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage appears every three seconds. Toscroll through the message, press and release theINFO button. A new group of words displaysafter every press of the button. Once the completemessage displays, the information symboldisappears from the display until another newmessage is received. The last message can bedisplayed by pressing the INFO button. Thelast message can be viewed until a new messageis received or you can tune to a different station.

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio systemhas been calibrated for your vehicle from thefactory. If CAL ERR displays, it means that theradio has not been configured properly forthe vehicle and must be returned to your dealerfor service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takethe vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 274 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer pulls it in and the CD should begin playing. Ifyou want to insert a CD with the ignition off, firstpress the eject button or the INFO knob.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD inthe player, it stays in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CD starts playingwhere it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.As each new track starts to play, the track numberdisplays.

242

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There may be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of theCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDsand DVDs on page 296 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could getcaught in the CD player. If a CD is recorded ona personal computer and a description labelis needed, try labeling the top of the recordedCD with a marking pen.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.

If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to goto the beginning of the current track (if morethan eight seconds have played), or to thebeginning of the previous track (if less thaneight seconds have played). TRACK and the tracknumber displays. If this pushbutton is held orpressed more than once, the player continuesmoving backward through the CD.

2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the nexttrack. TRACK and the track number displays.If this pushbutton is held or pressed morethan once, the player continues moving forwardthrough the CD.

243

3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbuttonto quickly reverse within a track. Press and holdthis pushbutton for less than two seconds toreverse at six times the normal playing speed.Press and hold it for more than two secondsto reverse at 17 times the normal playing speed.ET and the elapsed time of the track displays.Release this pushbutton to play the passage.

4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbuttonto quickly advance within a track. Press andhold this pushbutton for less than two seconds toadvance at six times the normal playing speed.Press and hold it for more than two secondsto advance at 17 times the normal playing speed.ET and the elapsed time of the track displays.Release this pushbutton to play the passage.

6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hearthe tracks in random, rather than sequential,order. RDM ON displays. RDM T and the tracknumber displays when each track starts toplay. Press this pushbutton again to turn offrandom play. RDM OFF displays.

©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the current or to the previous track. Pressthe right arrow to go to the start of the nexttrack. If either arrow is pressed more than once,the player continues moving backward orforward through the CD.

©SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN orthe TYPE arrows for more than two seconds untilSCAN displays and a beep sounds. The radio goesto the next track, plays for 10 seconds, then goes tothe next track. Press either the SCAN or the TYPEarrows again, to stop scanning.

INFO (Information): Press this knob to see howlong the current track has been playing. ETand the elapsed time displays. To change thedefault on the display, track, or elapsed time, pressthe knob until you see the desired display, thenpress and hold the knob for two seconds.The radio produces one beep and the selecteddisplay becomes the default.

244

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The inactive CD remainsinside the radio for future listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play aCD while listening to the radio, or to listen toan auxiliary source (such as rear seatentertainment, if equipped).

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Ejectcan be activated with either the ignition or radiooff. CDs can be loaded with the radio and ignitionoff if this button is pressed first.

CD MessagesIf the CD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer. If theradio displays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer when reportingthe problem.

245

Radio with CD (MP3)


Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information.





• Seek to stations with traffic announcements


While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters display instead of thefrequency. RDS stations may also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the programbeing broadcast.


246


Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the systemon and off.

o VOL p (Volume): Turn this knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase or to decreasethe volume.

DISPL (Display): When the ignition is turned off,press this knob to display the time.

For RDS, press the DISPL knob to change thedisplay while using RDS. The display options arestation name, RDS station frequency, PTY,and the name of the program (if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISPL knobwhile in XM™ mode to retrieve four differentcategories of information related to the currentsong or channel: Artist, Song Title, Categoryor PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press theDISPL knob until you see the desired display, thenpress and hold this knob for two seconds. Theradio produces one beep and the selected displaybecomes the default.

247

AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system adjusts automaticallyto make up for road and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press thisbutton to select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOLdisplays. Each higher setting allows for morevolume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.Then as you drive, automatic volume increases thevolume, as necessary, to overcome noise at anyspeed. The volume level should always soundthe same to you as you drive. NONE displays if theradio cannot determine the vehicle speed. Toturn automatic volume off, press this button untilOFF displays.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Thedisplay shows the selection.

o TUNE p: Turn this knob to selectradio stations.

o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow togo to the next or to the previous station andstay there.

The radio only seeks stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

o SCAN p: Press and hold either arrow formore than two seconds. SCAN displays and theradio produces one beep. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds, then goes to thenext station. Press either arrow again or one ofthe pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.

To scan preset stations, press and hold eitherarrow for more than four seconds. PSCN displaysand the radio produces two beeps. The radiogoes to a preset station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next preset station. Presseither arrow again or one of the pushbuttons tostop scanning presets.

The radio only scans stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

248

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons, byperforming the following steps:




4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed, thestation that was set, returns and theequalization that was selected is stored forthat pushbutton.


Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob untilBASS, MID (midrange) (without Bose®), or TREB(treble) displays. Turn the knob to increase or todecrease the tone. The display shows the bass,midrange (without Bose®), or the treble level. If astation is weak or has static, decrease the treble.

To adjust the bass, midrange (without Bose®), orthe treble to the middle position while it is displayed,push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio producesone beep.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knobwhile no tone or speaker control is displayed. ALLCENTERED displays and a beep sounds.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press thisbutton to select customized equalization settingsdesigned for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock,and classical.

To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,push and release the AUTO EQ button untilCUSTOM displays.

If the radio has the Bose audio system, theequalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.

249


AUDIO: To adjust the balance between theright and the left speakers, push and release theAUDIO knob until BAL (balance) displays.Turn the knob to move the sound toward the rightor the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, push and release the AUDIO knobuntil FADE displays. Turn the knob to move thesound toward the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance or the fade to the middleposition while it is displayed, push the AUDIOknob, then push it again and hold it until youhear one beep.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knobwhen no tone or speaker control displays.ALL CENTERED displays and a beep sounds.

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform thefollowing:

1. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.

2. Once the desired PTY displays, press theSEEK TYPE button to select and go to thePTY’s first station.

3. To go to another station within that PTY,press the SEEK TYPE button twice todisplay the PTY and then to go to anotherstation.

4. Press the P-TYPE knob to exit program typeselect mode.IF PTY times out and no longer displays, goback to Step 1.

If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio searchesfor stations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.

If the radio cannot find the desired program type,NONE displays and the radio returns to thelast station you were listening to.

250

BAND (AF – Alternate Frequency): Alternatefrequency lets the radio switch to a stronger stationwith the same program type. To turn alternatefrequency on, press and hold BAND fortwo seconds. A ON displays. The radio canswitch to stations with a stronger frequency.



RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or nationalemergencies. When an alert announcementcomes on the current radio station, ALERT!displays. You will hear the announcement, even ifthe volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD isplaying, play stops during the announcement. Alertannouncements cannot be turned off.

ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supportedby all RDS stations.

INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, the information symbol displays.Press this button to see the message. Themessage can display the artist, song title, call inphone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage appears every three seconds. Toscroll through the message, press and release theINFO button. A new group of words displayafter every press of this button. Once the completemessage has displayed, the information symboldisappears from the display until another newmessage is received. The last message can bedisplayed by pressing the INFO button. Thelast message can be viewed until a new messageis received or you tune to a different station.

When a message is not available from a station,No Info displays.

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF displays, the tunedstation broadcasts traffic announcements and youwill hear a traffic announcement when thetuned radio station broadcasts one.

251

If the station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press the TRAF button and theradio seeks to a station that does. When a stationthat broadcasts traffic announcements is found,the radio stops seeking and TRAF displays.If no station is found that broadcasts trafficannouncements, No Traf displays.

If TRAF displays, press the TRAF button to turnoff the traffic announcements.

The radio plays the traffic announcement if thevolume is low. The radio interrupts the playof a CD if the last tuned station broadcaststraffic announcements.

This function does not apply to XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio systemhas been calibrated for your vehicle from thefactory. If CAL ERR displays it means thatthe radio has not been configured properly foryour vehicle and it must be returned to your dealerfor service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takeyour vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.


Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in, and READING displays. TheCD should begin playing. If you want to insert aCD with the ignition off, first press the eject buttonor the DISPL knob.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD inthe player it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts to playwhere it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber also displays.

252

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-sizeCDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in thesame manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDsand DVDs on page 296 for more information.


Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.



1 FLD x (Previous): This pushbutton does notwork while using a non-MP3 CD.

2 FLD w (Next): This pushbutton does not workwhile using a non-MP3 CD.

3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbuttonto reverse quickly within a track. Press and holdthis pushbutton for less than two seconds toreverse at 10 times the normal playing speed.Press and hold it for more than two secondsto reverse at 20 times the normal playing speed.Release this pushbutton to play the passage.ET and the elapsed time of the track displays.

253

4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbuttonto advance quickly within a track. Press andhold this pushbutton for less than two seconds toadvance at six times the normal playing speed.Press and hold it for more than two secondsto advance at 17 times the normal playing speed.Release this pushbutton to play the passage.ET and the elapsed time of the track displays.

6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hearthe tracks in random, rather than sequential,order. RDM ON displays. RDM and the tracknumber displays when each track starts to play.Press RDM again to turn off random play.RDM OFF displays.

o SEEK p: Press the left arrow to go to the startof the current or the previous track. Press the rightarrow to go to the start of the next track. Pressingeither arrow for more than two seconds scans theprevious or next tracks at five to eight seconds pertrack. SCAN and the track number displays. Presseither arrow to stop scanning.

o TUNE p: Turning the TUNE knob fast tracksreverse or advances through tracks. The tracknumber displays for each track.

DISPL (Display): Press this knob to see howlong the current track has been playing. ET andthe elapsed time of the track displays. Tochange the default on the display, track or elapsedtime, press this knob until you see the desireddisplay, then press and hold the knob fortwo seconds. The radio produces one beep andthe selected display becomes the default.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The inactive CD remainsinside the radio for future listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play aCD while listening to the radio. The CD symboldisplays when a CD is loaded.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Ejectmay be activated with either the ignition or radiooff. CDs can be loaded with the ignition andradio off if this button is pressed first.

Playing an MP3 CD-R DiscYour vehicle’s radio system may have the MP3feature. If it has this feature, it is capable of playingan MP3 CD-R disc. For more information onhow to play an MP3 CD-R disc, see Using an MP3on page 268 later in this section.

254

CD MessagesCHECK CD: If this message appears on thedisplay and/or the CD ejects, it could be for one ofthe following reasons:• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to

normal, the CD should play.• You are driving on a very rough road. When the

road becomes smoother, the CD should play.• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or

upside down.• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour

and try again.• The format of the CD is not compatible. See

Using an MP3 on page 268 later in this section.• There could have been a problem while burning

the CD.• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer when reporting theproblem.

Radio with Six-Disc CD



255

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System(RDS). RDS features are available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDS information.






While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters display instead of thefrequency. RDS stations may also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the program beingbroadcast.


Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the systemon and off.

o VOLUME p: Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or to decreasethe volume.

INFO (Information): When the ignition is off,press this knob to display the time.

256

For RDS, press the INFO knob to change whatappears on the display while using RDS. Thedisplay options are station name, RDS stationfrequency, PTY, and the name of the program(if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob whilein XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories ofinformation related to the current song or channel:Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, ChannelNumber/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press theINFO knob until you see the desired display, thenhold the knob until a beep sounds. The selecteddisplay becomes the default.

AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system adjusts automatically tomake up for road and wind noise as you drive byincreasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press thisbutton to select MIN (minimum), MED (medium), orMAX (maximum). AUTO VOL displays. Each highersetting provides more volume compensation atfaster vehicle speeds. To turn automatic volume off,press this button until AUTO VOL OFF displays.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Thedisplay shows the selection.

oTUNE p: Turn this knob to selectradio stations.

©SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or theTYPE arrows to go to the next or to the previousstation and stay there.

The radio only seeks stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

©SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN orthe TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCNdisplays and a beep sounds. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds, then goes tothe next station. Press either the SCAN orthe TYPE arrows again to stop scanning.

257

To scan preset stations, press and hold eitherthe SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more thanfour seconds. PSC displays and a double beepsounds. The radio goes to a preset station, playsfor a few seconds, then goes to the next presetstation. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrowsagain to stop scanning presets.

The radio only scans stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogramed on the six numbered pushbuttons, byperforming the following steps:




4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Wheneverthat numbered pushbutton is pressed,the station that was set, returns.


To store an equalization setting to a preset stationperform the following:1. Tune to the preset station.2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to

select the equalization setting.Once the equalization no longer displays, theequalization is set for that preset station.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob untilBASS, MID (midrange) (without Bose®), or TREB(treble) displays. Turn the knob to increase or todecrease the tone. The display shows the bass,midrange (without Bose®), or treble level. If astation is weak or has static, decrease the treble.

To adjust the bass, midrange (without Bose®), ortreble to the middle position while it is displayed,push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio producesone beep and adjusts the display level to the middleposition.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knobwhen no tone or speaker controls displays. ALLCENTERED displays and a beep sounds.

258

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press thisbutton to select customized equalization settingsdesigned for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock,and classical.

The radio saves separate AUTO EQ settings foreach preset and source.

If the radio has the Bose® audio system, theequalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.


AUDIO: To adjust the balance between theright and the left speakers, push and releasethe AUDIO knob until BAL (balance) displays.Turn the knob to move the sound toward theright or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and rearspeakers, push and release the AUDIO knob untilFAD (fade) displays. Turn the knob to movethe sound toward the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance or fade to the middleposition while it is displayed, push and hold theAUDIO knob. The radio produces one beepand adjusts the display level to the middle position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knobwhen no tone or speaker controls display.ALL CENTERED displays and a beep sounds.

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform thefollowing:

1. Press the TYPE button to activate programtype select mode. P-TYPE and the lastselected PTY displays.


3. Once the desired PTY displays, press eitherthe TYPE or the SEEK arrows to select andto go to the PTY’s first station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY,press the TYPE button, then press eitherthe TYPE or the SEEK arrows once.

5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrowstwice to exit the program type select mode.

259

SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY byperforming the following:



3. Once the desired PTY displays, press andhold either the TYPE or the SCAN arrowsfor two seconds, and the radio beginsscanning the stations in the PTY.

4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows tostop scanning.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternatefrequency lets the radio switch to a strongerstation with the same program type. To turnalternate frequency on, press and hold BAND fortwo seconds. AF ON displays. The radio canswitch to stations with a stronger frequency.



Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Upto 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons, byperforming the following steps:

1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.



4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed (while inPTY mode), the PTY that was set, returns.


260

RDS Messages

INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, INFO displays. Press this button tosee the message. The message can display theartist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage appears every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message, press and release the INFObutton. A new group of words displays after everypress of this button. Once the complete messagehas displayed, INFO disappears from the displayuntil another new message is received. The lastmessage is displayed by pressing the INFO button.View the last message until a new message isreceived or you tune to a different station.

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio systemhas been calibrated for your vehicle from thefactory. If CAL ERR displays, it means that theradio has not been configured properly forthe vehicle and must be returned to your dealerfor service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takethe vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.


Playing a CDIf the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD inthe player, it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts playingwhere it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symboldisplays. As each new track starts to play, thetrack number displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

261

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDsand DVDs on page 296 for more information.


Do not add any label to a CD, it could getcaught in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.



LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CDplayer. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and release the LOAD button.

3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the rightof the slot, to turn green.

4. Load a CD. Insert the CD part way into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

262

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and hold the LOAD button fortwo seconds.A beep sounds and the indicator light, locatedto the right of the slot, begins to flash andMULTI LOAD # displays.

3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,INSERT CD # displays, load a CD. Insert theCD part way into the slot, label side up.The player pulls the CD in.Once the CD is loaded, the indicator lightbegins flashing again. Once the light stopsflashing and turns green, you can load anotherCD. The CD player takes up to six CDs. Donot try to load more than six.

To load more than one CD but less than six,complete Steps 1 through 3. When finished loadingCDs, press the LOAD button to cancel theloading function. The radio begins to play the lastCD loaded.

If more than one CD has been loaded, a numberfor each CD displays.

Playing a Specific Loaded CDFor every CD loaded, a number displays. To playa specific CD, first press the CD AUX button (ifnot already in CD mode), then press the numberedpushbutton that corresponds to the CD. A smallbar displays under the CD number that isplaying and the track number displays.If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

CDZ (Eject): Press this button to eject CD(s).To eject the CD that is currently playing, pressand release this button.To eject multiple CDs, do the following:1. Press and hold the CD eject button for

two seconds.A beep sounds and the indicator light, locatedto the right of the slot, begins to flash andEJECT ALL displays.

2. Once the light stops flashing, REMOVE CD #displays. The CD ejects and can be removed.Once the CD is removed, the indicator lightbegins flashing again and another CD ejects.To stop ejecting the CDs, press theeject button.

263

If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, theCD automatically pulls back into the player. If CDis pushed back into the player, before the25-second time period is complete, the playersenses an error and tries to eject the CD severaltimes before stopping.

Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button toeject a CD after you have tried to push it inmanually. The player’s 25-second eject timerresets at each press of eject, causing the player tonot eject the CD until the 25-second time periodhas elapsed.

{ REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse quickly within a track. You will hearsound at a reduced volume. Release the buttonto play the passage. The elapsed time of thetrack displays.

FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this buttonto advance quickly within a track. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thebutton to play the passage. The elapsed timeof the track displays.

RPT (Repeat): With the repeat setting, one trackor an entire CD can be repeated.

To use repeat, do the following:

• To repeat the track you are listening to, pressand release the RPT button. RPT displays.Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.

• To repeat the CD you are listening to, pressand hold the RPT button for two seconds.RPT displays. Press RPT again to turnoff repeat play.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, youcan listen to the tracks in random, rather thansequential, order, on one CD or on all of the CDs.To use random, do one of the following:

• To play the tracks on the CD you are listeningto in random order, press and release theRDM button. RANDOM ONE displays. PressRDM again to turn off random play.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that areloaded in random order, press and holdRDM for more than two seconds. A beepsounds and RANDOM ALL displays. PressRDM again to turn off random play.

264

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): PressAUTO EQ to select the equalization settingwhile playing a CD. The equalization is storedwhenever a CD is played. For more informationon AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previouslyin this section.

©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the current track, if more than ten secondshave played. Press the right arrow to go to thenext track. If either arrow is pressed more thanonce, the player continues moving backwardor forward through the CD.

©SCAN ¨: To scan one CD, press and holdeither SCAN arrow for more than two seconds untilTRACK SCAN displays and a beep sounds. Theradio goes to the next track, plays for 10 seconds,then goes to the next track. Press either SCANarrow again, to stop scanning.

To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold eitherSCAN arrow for more than four seconds until ALLCD SCAN displays and a beep sounds. Usethis feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first trackof each loaded CD. Press either SCAN arrowagain, to stop scanning.

INFO (Information): Press this knob to see howlong the current track has been playing. To changethe default on the display, track or elapsed time,press the knob until you see the desired display,then press and hold the knob until a beep sounds.The selected display becomes the default.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) remainsinside the radio for future listening.

Using Song List ModeThe six-disc CD changer has a feature calledsong list. This feature is capable of saving20 track selections.

To save tracks into the song list feature, performthe following steps:

1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at leastone CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously inthis section for more information.

2. Check to see that the CD changer is not insong list mode. S-LIST should not appear onthe display. If S-LIST is displayed, pressthe SONG LIST button to turn it off.

265

3. Select the desired CD by pressing thenumbered pushbutton and then use the SEEKor TYPE right arrow to locate the track tobe saved. The track begins to play.

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button tosave the track into memory. When SONGLIST is pressed, one beep sounds. Aftertwo seconds of continuously pressingthe SONG LIST button, two beeps sound toconfirm the track has been saved.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving otherselections.

S-LIST FULL displays if you try to save more than20 selections.

To play the song list, press the SONG LISTbutton. One beep sounds and S-LIST displays.The recorded tracks begin to play in the order theywere saved.

Seek through the song list by using the SEEK orTYPE arrows. Seeking past the last savedtrack returns to the first saved track.

To delete tracks from the song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song liston. S-LIST displays.

3. Press either SEEK or TYPE arrow to selectthe desired track to be deleted.

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button fortwo seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed,one beep sounds. After two seconds ofcontinuously pressing the SONG LIST button,two beeps sound to confirm that the trackhas been deleted.

After a track has been deleted, the remainingtracks are moved up the list. When another trackis added to the song list, the track is added tothe end of the list.

266

To delete the entire song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song liston. S-LIST displays.

3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button formore than four seconds. One beep sounds,followed by two beeps after two seconds, anda final beep sounds after four seconds.S-LIST EMPTY displays indicating the songlist has been deleted.

If a CD is ejected, and the song list containssaved tracks from that CD, those tracks areautomatically deleted from the song list. Any trackssaved to the song list again are added to thebottom of the list.

To end song list mode, press the SONG LISTbutton. One beep sounds and S-LIST is removedfrom the display.

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message appears on thedisplay and/or the CD ejects, it could be for one ofthe following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer. If theradio displays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer when reportingthe problem.

267

Listening to a DVDIf your vehicle has the Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system and a DVD isplaying, the DVD symbol displays indicatingthat the DVD is available and can be listenedto through your vehicle’s speakers.

To listen to the DVD, press the CD AUX buttonuntil RSE displays. The current radio source stopsand the DVD sound comes through the speakers.

To stop listening to the DVD, press the CDAUX button, if a CD is loaded, or press theBAND button to select a different source.

When the RSE system is turned off, theDVD symbol goes off of the radio display andRSE OFF displays. The radio returns to the lastradio source that you were listening to.

See Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 277for more information.

Using an MP3

MP3 CD-R DiscMP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded ona CD-R disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 fileson one disc.

• Make sure playlists have a .m3u or .wplextension, other file extensions may not work.

• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed orvariable bit rates. Song title, artist name, andalbum is available for display by the radiowhen recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Make sure to finalize the disc when burningan MP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It isusually better to burn the disc all at once.

268

The player is able to read and play a maximumof 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and255 files. Long file names, folder names, or playlistnames can use more disc memory space thannecessary. To conserve space on the disc,minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlistnames. You can also play an MP3 CD thatwas recorded using no file folders. The systemcan support up to 11 folders in depth, though, keepthe depth of the folders to a minimum in orderto keep down the complexity and confusionin trying to locate a particular folder duringplayback. If a CD contains more than themaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,and 255 files the player lets you access andnavigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum are ignored.

Root DirectoryThe root directory is treated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audio files, thedirectory displays as F1 ROOT. All files containeddirectly under the root directory are accessedprior to any root directory folders. However,playlists (Px) are always accessed before rootfolders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen the CD contains only compressed files, thefiles are located under the root folder. The nextand previous folder functions do not function on aCD that was recorded without folders or playlists.When displaying the name of the folder theradio displays ROOT.

When the CD contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all filesare located under the root folder. The folderdown and the folder up buttons searchplaylists (Px) first and then goes to the rootfolder. When the radio displays the nameof the folder the radio displays ROOT.

269

Order of PlayTracks are played in the following order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• If the CD does not contain any playlists, thenplay begins from the first track under the rootdirectory. When all tracks from the rootdirectory have played, play continues fromfiles according to their numerical listing. Afterplaying the last track from the last folder,play begins again at the first track of the firstfolder or root directory.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessthe folder mode has been chosen as the defaultdisplay. See DISPL later in this section formore information. The new track name appearson the display.

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song namethat is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name isnot present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displaysthe file name without the extension (suchas .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages are shortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extension of the filenamedoes not display.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.

Playing an MP3Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in, and READING displays.The CD should begin playing and the CD symboldisplays. If you want to insert a CD with theignition off, first press the eject button or theDISPL knob.

270

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CDin the player it stays in the player. Whenthe ignition or radio is turned on, the CD startsto play where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of theCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDsand DVDs on page 296 for more information.


Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.


If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

1 FLD x (Previous Folder): Press thispushbutton to go to the first track in the previousfolder. Press this button while in folder randomto go to the first track in the previous folderand random the tracks in that folder.

271

2 FLD w (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton togo to the first track in the next folder. Press thisbutton while in folder random to go to the firsttrack in the next folder and random the tracksin that folder.

3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbuttonto reverse quickly within a track. Press and holdthis pushbutton for less than two seconds toreverse at 10 times the normal playing speed.Press and hold it for more than two secondsto reverse at 20 times the normal playing speed.Release this pushbutton to play the passage.REV and the elapsed time of the track displays.

4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbuttonto advance quickly within a track. Press andhold this pushbutton for less than two seconds toadvance at 10 times the normal playing speed.Press and hold it for more than two secondsto advance at 20 times the normal playing speed.Release this pushbutton to play the passage.FWD and the elapsed time of the track displays.

6 RDM (Random): Press and release thispushbutton to play the tracks of a current folder orplaylist, in random order. FLDR RDM displays.Once all of the tracks a current folder or playlisthave played the system moves on to the next folderor playlist and play all of the tracks in random order.

To random all the tracks on the CD, press and holdthis pushbutton for two seconds. A beep soundsand DISC RDM displays. This feature does notwork with playlists.

When in random, pressing and releasing eitherSEEK arrow takes you to the next or previousrandom track.

Press and release this pushbutton again to turn offrandom play. NO RDM displays.

o SEEK p: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the previous track. Press the right arrow togo to the start of the next track. Pressing eitherarrow for more than two seconds searchesthe previous or next tracks at two tracksper second. Release the button to stopsearching and to play the track.

272

o TUNE p: Turn the TUNE knob to fast trackreverse or advance through the tracks in all foldersor playlists. The track number and file namedisplays for each track. Turning this knob while inrandom will fast track reverse or advance thetracks in sequential order.

DISPL (Display): Press this knob to switchbetween track mode, folder/playlist mode, andtime of day mode. The display shows onlyeight characters, but there can be up to four pagesof text. If there are more than eight charactersin the song, folder, or playlist name, they aredisplayed if the knob is not pressed again,pressing this knob within two seconds takes youto the next display mode.

• Track mode displays the current track numberand the ID3 tag song name.

• Folder/playlist mode displays the currentfolder or playlist number and the folder/playlist name.

• Time of day mode displays the time of dayand the ID3 tag song name.

To change the default on the display, press theDISPL knob until you see the desired display, thenpress and hold this knob for two seconds. Theradio produces one beep and the selected displaybecomes the default.

INFO (Information): INFO displays when acurrent track has ID3 tag information. Press thisbutton to display the artist name and albumcontained in the tag. INFO disappears from thedisplay when the information in the ID3 taghas finished.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD remainsinside the radio for future listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play aCD when listening to the radio. The CD symboldisplays when a CD is loaded.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Ejectcan activate with either the ignition or radio off.CDs can be loaded with the ignition and radio off ifthis button is pressed first.

273

XM Radio MessagesIf you have a Radio with CD or Radio with Six-Disc CD, you can receive these radio display messages.

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune toanother channel.

CH Unavail Channel nolonger available

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

274

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Locked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message isreceived after having your vehicle serviced, check withyour dealer.

Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with theXM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed toactivate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, therecould be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

275

If you have a Radio with CD (MP3), you can receive these radio display messages.

Radio Display Message Condition Action RequiredXL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No Signl Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicleis moved into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The radio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune toanother channel.

CH Unavl Channel nolonger available

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

276

Radio Display Message Condition Action RequiredNot Found No channel available for

the chosen categoryThere are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Lock Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after having your vehicle serviced,check with your dealer.

Radio ID Radio ID label(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, therecould be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Check XM Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

Navigation/Radio SystemYour vehicle may have a navigation radio system.

The navigation system has built-in featuresintended to minimize driver distraction. Technologyalone, no matter how advanced, can neverreplace your own judgment. See the NavigationSystem manual for some tips to help youreduce distractions while driving.

Rear Seat Entertainment SystemYour vehicle may have the Digital VersatileDisc (DVD) Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)system. The RSE system includes a DVD player,a video display screen, two sets of wirelessheadphones, and a remote control.

277

Parental ControlThis button is located behind the video screen.Press this button while a DVD or CD is playing tofreeze the video and mute the audio. The videoscreen will display Parental Control ON and thepower indicator light on the DVD player will flash. Itwill also disable all other button operations from theremote control and the DVD player, with theexception of the eject button. Press this buttonagain to restore operation of the DVD player.

This button may also be used to turn the DVDplayer power on and automatically resume play ifthe ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or if RAPis active.

Before You DriveThe RSE system is for rear seat passengers only.The driver cannot safely view the video screenwhile driving and should not try to do so.

HeadphonesThe RSE system includes two sets of wirelessheadphones.

Each set of headphones has an ON/OFF control.An indicator light will illuminate on the headphoneswhen they are on. If the light does not illuminate,the batteries may need to be replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” following for more information.Each set of headphones has a volume knob. Toadjust the volume, adjust this knob.The transmitters are located below the videodisplay screen. The headphones will shut offautomatically if they lose the signal from the systemafter about four minutes to save battery power. Thesignal may be lost if the system is turned off or if theheadphones are out of range of the transmitters.When using the wired headphones, if the front seatpassengers play a CD in the Radio with Six-DiscCD (if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite RadioService (if equipped), you will hear the audio forthese sources, instead of the DVD or CD thatis currently playing through the RSE.

Notice: Do not store the headphones in heator direct sunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will not be covered byyour warranty. Keep the headphones storedin a cool, dry place.Both sets of rear seat headphones may includefoam ear pads that can be replaced.

278

Foam ear pads on these headphones may becomeworn or damaged. The headphone foam ear padscan become damaged if they are not handled orstored properly. If the foam ear pads do becomedamaged or worn out, the pads can be replacedseparately from the headphone set. It is notnecessary to replace the complete headphone set.

The headphone replacement foam ear pads canbe ordered in pairs. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries, do the following:

1. Loosen the screw on the batterycompartment door located on the leftside of the headphone earpiece.

2. Replace the two AAA batteries in thecompartment. Make sure that they areinstalled correctly, using the diagram on theinside of the battery compartment.

3. Tighten the screw to close thecompartment door.

If the headphones are to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keep themin a cool, dry place.

Stereo RCA JacksThe RCA jacks are located behind the videoscreen. The RCA jacks allow audio and videosignals to be connected from an auxiliary devicesuch as a camcorder or a video game unit to theRSE system. Standard RCA cables, not included,are needed to connect the auxiliary device to theRCA jacks. The yellow connector inputs video andthe red and white connectors input right and leftaudio. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions forproper connection of the auxiliary device.

To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system,connect an external auxiliary device to thecolor-coded RCA jacks and turn both the auxiliarydevice and the RSE system power on. If theRSE system had been previously in the DVDplayer mode, pressing the SRCE button onthe faceplate or the remote control will switch theRSE system between the auxiliary device andthe DVD player.

279

How to Change the Video Format when inthe Auxiliary ModeThe auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC.In some countries, the video format may be inthe PAL system. To change the video format,perform the following:

1. Press the display menu button.

2. Press the down arrow button to highlight theVideo Format option.

3. Press the enter button to select Video Format.

4. Press the right or left arrow button to selectthe desired video format.

5. Press the enter button to accept the change.

Audio OutputAudio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs maybe heard through the following possible sources:

• Wireless Headphones

• Vehicle Speakers

• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the RearSeat Audio system (if equipped)

The RSE system will always transmit the audiosignal by infrared to the wireless headphones,if there is audio available. See “Headphones”previously for more information.

The RSE system is capable of outputting audio tothe vehicle speakers by using the radio. The RSEsystem may be selected as an audio source on theradio if the RSE system power is on. Once the RSEsystem is selected as an audio source on the radio,adjust the speaker volume on the radio, ifnecessary. If the RSE system power is not on, theRSE system will not be an available source on theradio. Refer to the radio information for the radiothat your vehicle has for more information.

The RSE system is capable of outputting audio tothe wired headphone jacks on the rear seataudio system (if equipped). The RSE system maybe selected as an audio source on the rearseat audio system if the RSE system power is on.Refer to Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 292for more information.

280

Video ScreenThe video screen is located in the overheadconsole.

To use the video screen, do the following:

1. Push forward on the release button located onthe DVD display console.

2. Pull the screen down, away from you, andadjust its position as desired.

When the video screen is not in use, push it upinto its locked position.

If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to itslocked position, the screen will shut off, but theDVD will continue to play through the previousaudio or video source.

The video screen contains the IR transmitters forthe wireless headphones and the IR receiversfor the remote control. If the screen is in the closedposition, the signals will not be available for theoperation of the headphones or the remote control.

Notice: Avoid directly touching the videoscreen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaningthe Video Screen” later in this section formore information.

DVD PlayerThe DVD player is located in the overheadconsole. The DVD player can be controlled by thebuttons on the DVD player and/or by the buttonson the remote control. See “Remote Control” laterin this section for more information.

The DVD player power may be turned on whenthe ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or whenRetained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.

281

The RSE system DVD player is only compatiblewith DVDs of the appropriate region code for thecountry that the vehicle was sold in. The DVDregion code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs.

Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, Video CDand Photo CD/CD-R media are fully supported bythis DVD player. DVD-R and DVD-RW mediais supported if formatted as DVD-Video. DVD+Rand DVD+RW media may or may not be supportedby the DVD player. The DVD player does notsupport DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, and DVD Audiomedia. An error message will appear on thedisplay if this type of media is inserted into theDVD player.

When using the wired headphones, not included, ifthe front seat passengers play a CD in theRadio with Six-Disc CD (if equipped) or use XM™Satellite Radio Service (if equipped), you willhear the audio for these sources, instead of theDVD or CD that is currently playing throughthe RSE.

If an error message appears on the video screen,see “DVD Messages” later in this section.

DVD Player Buttons (Without Sunroof)

O (Power): Press this button to turn the RSEsystem on and off. The power indicator lightwill illuminate when the power is on.

X (Eject): Press this button to eject a DVDor CD.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween the DVD player and an auxiliary source.

282

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD or CD.Press this button twice to return to the beginningof the DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start playof a DVD or CD. Press this button while aDVD or CD is playing to pause it. Press this buttonagain to continue the play of the DVD or CD.

y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button toaccess the DVD menu. The DVD menu is differenton every DVD. Use the up, down, left, and rightarrow buttons to move the cursor around theDVD menu. After making a selection press theenter button. This button only operates whenplaying a DVD.

z (Set-up Menu): Press this button to adjust thecolor, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode,and dynamic range compression. The dynamicrange compression feature can be used to reduceloud audio and increase low audio produced bysome DVDs.

To change a feature back to the factory defaultsetting, press this button to display the feature,then press and hold this button. The default settingwill appear on the display.

While playing an Audio or DVD disc, press andhold this button to display and to remove the trackand time information.

n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Usethe arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press this button to select thechoices that are highlighted in any menu.

283

DVD Player Buttons (With Sunroof)

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start playof a DVD or CD. Press this button while aDVD or CD is playing to pause it. Press this buttonagain to continue the play of the DVD or CD.

cX (Stop/Eject): Press this button tostop playing, rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVDor CD. Press this button twice to return to thebeginning of the DVD.

Press and hold this button for more thanthree seconds to eject a DVD or CD.

Playing a DiscTo play a disc, gently insert the disc with the labelside up into the loading slot. The DVD playerwill continue loading the disc and the player willautomatically start, if the vehicle is in RUN,ACCESSORY, or when RAP is active.

If a disc is already in the player, press theplay/pause button on the DVD player faceplateor on the remote control.

Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding orskipping of the copyright information or thepreviews. Some DVDs will begin playing afterthe previews have finished. If the DVD does notbegin to play the main title, refer to theon-screen instructions.

Stopping and Resuming PlaybackTo stop playing a disc, press and release thestop button on the DVD player faceplate orthe remote control.

To resume playback, press the play/pause buttonon the DVD player faceplate or the remotecontrol. The movie should resume play from whereit was last stopped, if the disc has not beenejected and the stop button has not been pressedtwice. If the disc has been ejected or if the stopbutton has been pressed twice, the disc willresume play at the beginning.

284

Ejecting a Disc (DVD Playerwithout Sunroof)Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplateto eject the disc. There is not an eject button onthe remote control.

If a disc is ejected from the player, but is notremoved, the DVD player will reload the disc aftera short period of time. The disc will be storedin the DVD player. The DVD player will not resumeplay of the disc automatically.

Ejecting a Disc (DVD Player with Sunroof)Press and hold the stop/eject button for morethan two seconds on the DVD player faceplate toeject the disc. There is not an eject button onthe remote control.

If a disc is ejected from the player, but is notremoved, the DVD player will reload the disc aftera short period of time. The disc will be storedin the DVD player. The DVD player will not resumeplay of the disc automatically.

Remote ControlTo use the remote control, aim it at the transmitterwindow below the video screen and press thedesired button. Direct sunlight or very bright lightmay affect the ability of the RSE system toreceive signals from the remote control. If theremote control does not seem to be working, thebatteries may need to be replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” later in this section.

Objects blocking the line of sight may also affectthe function of the remote control.

Notice: Storing the remote control in a hotarea or in direct sunlight may damage it,and the repairs will not be covered by yourwarranty. Keep the remote control stored in acool, dry place.

To extend the life of the batteries, the remotecontrol does not have a press and hold feature.

285

Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVDplayer on and off.

v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD tothe main menu of the DVD.

n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Usethe arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.

z (Set-up Menu): Press this button to adjust thecolor, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode,and dynamic range compression. The dynamicrange compression feature can be used to reduceloud audio and increase low audio produced bysome DVDs.

e (Audio): Press this button to display a menuthat will only appear when a DVD is being played.The format and content of this function will varyfor each disc.

r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fastreverse the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing,press this button again. This button may not workwhen the DVD is playing the copyright informationor the previews.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween the DVD player and an auxiliary source.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Pressthis button twice to return to the beginning ofthe DVD.

286

t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this buttonto return to the start of the current track or chapter.Press this button again to return to the previoustrack or chapter. This button may not workwhen the DVD is playing the copyright informationor the previews.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numerickeypad provides you with the capability ofdirect chapter, title, and track number selection.

}10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button toselect chapter, title, and track numbers greaterthan 9. Press this button before inputting thenumber.

\ (Clear): Press this button within three secondsafter inputting a number to clear the number(s).

P (Illumination): Press this button to turnthe remote control backlight on. The backlight willtime out after about 7 to 10 seconds if no otherbutton is pressed while the backlight is on.

y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to accessthe DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on everyDVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrowbuttons to move the cursor around the DVD menu.After making a selection press the enter button.This button only operates when playing a DVD.

r (Enter): Press this button to select thechoices that are highlighted in any menu.

q (Return): Press this button to exit the currentactive menu and return to the previous menu.This button will operate only when a DVD isplaying and a menu is active.

| (Camera Angle): Press this button to changecamera angles on DVDs that have this featurewhen a DVD is playing. The format and content ofthis function will vary for each disc.

{ (Subtitle): Press this button to turn on subtitlesand to move through subtitle options when aDVD is playing. The format and content of thisfunction will vary for each disc.

287

[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fastforward the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding,press this button again. This button may notwork when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play ofa DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CDis playing to pause it. Press this button again tocontinue the play of the DVD or CD.

When the DVD is playing, press the pause buttonthen press the fast forward button. The DVD willcontinue playing in a slow play mode. To cancelslow play mode, press the play/pause button.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button toadvance to the beginning of the next trackor chapter. This button may not work when theDVD is playing the copyright information orthe previews.

Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries, do the following:

1. Remove the battery compartment door locatedon the bottom of the remote control.

2. Replace the two AA batteries in thecompartment. Make sure that they areinstalled correctly, using the diagram on theinside of the battery compartment.

3. Close the battery door securely.

If the remote control is to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keep themin a cool, dry place.

288

Problem Recommended ActionNo power. The ignition might not be

in on or accessory.The parental controlbutton might have beenturned on. The powerindicator light will flash.

Disc will not play. The system might be off.The parental controlbutton might have beenturned on. The powerindicator light will flash.The system might be inauxiliary mode.The disc is upside downor is not compatible.

The picture does notfill the screen. Thereare black borders on thetop and bottom or onboth sides or it looksstretched out.

Check the displaymode settings in thedisplay menu.

The disc was ejected, butit was pulled back intothe DVD player.

The disc is being storedin the DVD player. Pressthe eject button again toeject the disc.

Problem Recommended ActionIn auxiliary mode, thepicture moves or scrolls.

Check the auxiliary inputconnections at bothdevices.Change the VideoFormat to PAL or NTSC.See “Stereo RCA Jacks”previously for how tochange the video format.

The language in theaudio or on the screenis wrong.

Check the audio orlanguage selection in themain DVD menu.

The remote control doesnot work.

Check to make surethere is no obstructionbetween the remotecontrol and thetransmitter window.Check the batteries tomake sure they are notdead or installedincorrectly.The parental controlbutton might have beenturned on. The powerindicator light will flash.

289

Problem Recommended ActionAfter stopping the player,I push Play butsometimes the DVDstarts where I left off andsometimes at thebeginning.

If the stop button waspressed one time, theDVD player will resumeplaying where the DVDwas stopped. If the stopbutton was pressedtwo times the DVD playerwill begin to play from thebeginning of the DVD.

The auxiliary source isrunning but there is nopicture or sound.

Check that the DVDplayer is in the auxiliarysource mode.Check the auxiliary inputconnections at bothdevices.

My disc is stuck in theplayer. The Load/Ejectbutton does not work.

Turn the DVD power off,then on, then press theload/eject button on theDVD player.Do not attempt to forciblyremove the disc from theDVD player. This couldpermanently damage thedisc and DVD player.

Problem Recommended ActionSometimes the wirelessheadphone audio cutsout or buzzes.

Check for obstructions,low batteries, receptionrange, and interferencefrom cellular telephonetowers or by using yourcellular telephone in thevehicle.Check that theheadphones are facingthe front of the vehicle.

I lost the remote and/orthe headphones.

See your dealer forassistance.

The DVD is playing,but there is no pictureor sound.

Check that the DVDplayer is in DVD mode.

The audio/video skipsor jumps.

The DVD or CD could bedirty, scratched, ordamaged.

The audio from the radiofor the Radio withSix-Disc CD and XM™has taken over the audiofrom the DVD or CDwhen using the wiredheadphones.

The RSE is workingcorrectly.Use the wirelessheadphones or have thefront seat passengerslisten to another audiosource.

290

DVD MessagesThe following errors may be displayed on thevideo screen:

Disc Format Error: This message will bedisplayed if a disc is inserted upside down, if thedisc is not readable, or if the format is notcompatible with the DVD player.

Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayedif the disc is not properly loaded or ejected.

Disc Play Error: This message will be displayedif the DVD player cannot play the disc. Scratchedor damaged discs will cause this error.

Region Code Error: This message will bedisplayed if the region code of the DVD is notcompatible with the region code of the DVD player.

No Disc: This message will be displayed if anyof the buttons on the DVD faceplate or remotecontrol are pressed and no disc is present in theDVD player.

DVD DistortionThere may be an experience with audio distortionin the wireless headphones when operatingcellular phones, scanners, CB radios, GlobalPositioning Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios,mobile fax, or walkie talkies.

It may be necessary to turn off the DVD playerwhen operating one of these devices in or nearthe vehicle.

* Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the Video ScreenPour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a cleancloth and gently wipe the video screen. Do notspray directly onto the screen and do not press toohard or too long on the video screen.

291

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)This feature allows rear seat passengers to listento any of the sources: radio, cassette tapes,CDs, or DVDs. However, the rear seat passengerscan only control the sources that the front seatpassengers are not listening to. For example, rearseat passengers may listen to and controlcassette tapes, CDs, or DVDs through theheadphones while the driver listens to the radiothrough the front speakers. The rear seatpassengers have control of the volume for eachset of headphones.

The front seat audio controls always have priorityover the RSA controls. If the front seatpassengers switch the source for the main radio toa remote source, the RSA will not be able tocontrol the source. You can operate the rear seataudio when the main radio is off.

P (Power): Press this button to turn the systemon or off. The rear speakers will be mutedwhen the power is turned on.

u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume. The left volume knobcontrols the left wired headphones and the rightvolume knob controls the right wired headphones.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to select asource: radio, cassette tape, CD, or DVD.The inactive tape, CD, or DVD will remain safelyinside the radio for future listening.

292

SEEK: Press this button to advance to thenext station or track and stay there. The displaywill show the selection. This function is inactive ifthe front seat passengers are listening to thesame audio source.

To scan preset stations, press and hold the SEEKbutton for two seconds and the radio will advance tothe next preset station. If you continue to hold thebutton down, the radio will continue to advancethrough the available preset stations. The displaywill show the selections. This function is inactive ifthe front seat passengers are listing to the radio.

When a cassette tape is playing, press the SEEKbutton to go to the next selection on the tape. Pressand hold the SEEK button to go to the other side ofthe tape. This function is inactive if the front seatpassengers are listening to a cassette tape.

When a CD is playing, press the SEEK button togo to the next track on the CD. This functionis inactive if the front seat passengers arelistening to a CD.

When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD player,press and hold the SEEK button for 2 seconds togo you to the next CD, if multiple CDs areloaded. This function is inactive if the front seatpassengers are listening to a CD.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft ofyour vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio ismoved to a different vehicle, it does not operateand LOCKED displays.

When the radio and vehicle are turned off, theblinking red light indicates that THEFTLOCK®

is armed.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does notoperate if stolen.

293

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

If your vehicle has this feature, some audiofunctions can be adjusted at the steering wheel.They include the following:

g (OnStar®/Mute): If your vehicle has OnStar,press this button to interact with the OnStarsystem. See the OnStar® System on page 145 inthis manual for more information.

If your vehicle does not have OnStar, press thisbutton to silence the system. Press it again, or anyother radio button, to turn on the sound.

PROG (Program): Press this button to play astation you have programmed on the radio presetpushbuttons. The radio will only seek presetstations with a strong signal that are in theselected band.

When a CD is playing in the CD changer, pressthis button to go to the next available CD, ifmultiple CDs are loaded.

Q SOURCE R: Press this button to switchbetween FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (ifequipped), or a CD. If a CD is loaded the CDsymbol will appear on the display.

QSEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow togo to the next or to the previous radio stationand stay there. The radio will only seek stationswith a strong signal that are in the selected band.

When a CD is playing, press the up or thedown arrow to fast forward or reverse.

Q VOL R (Volume): Press the up or the downarrow to increase or to decrease the volume.

294

Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interference andstatic during normal radio reception if itemssuch as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devicesare plugged into the accessory power outlet. Ifthere is interference or static, unplug the item fromthe accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other. Forbetter radio reception, most AM radio stationsboosts the power levels during the day, and thenreduce these levels during the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. When this happens,try reducing the treble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signalsreach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels can causeloss of the XM™ signal for a period of time.The radio could display NO XM SIGNAL toindicate interference.

295

Care of Your CDs and DVDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD does not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD and DVD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is notadvised, due to the risk of contaminating the lensof the CD optics with lubricants internal to theCD mechanism.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna can withstand most carwashes without being damaged. If the mast shouldever become slightly bent, straighten it out byhand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast isstill tightened to the fender. If tightening isrequired, tighten by hand, then with a wrenchone quarter turn.

296

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance ofthe XM™ system may be affected if the sunroofis open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna isnot obstructed.

Chime Level AdjustmentThe radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chimelevel. To change the volume level of the chime,press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignitionon and the radio power off. The volume level willchange from the normal level to loud, andLOUD CHIME will appear on the radio display.To change back to the default or normal setting,press and hold pushbutton 6 again. The volumelevel will change from the loud level to normal, andNORMAL CHIME will appear on the radiodisplay. Removing the radio and not replacing itwith a factory radio or chime module willdisable vehicle chimes.

297

✍ NOTES

298

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle ............................................ 300Defensive Driving ...................................... 300Drunken Driving ........................................ 301Control of a Vehicle .................................. 304Braking ...................................................... 304Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 305Braking in Emergencies ............................. 307Locking Rear Axle ..................................... 307StabiliTrak® System ................................... 307All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System

(TrailBlazer SS) ...................................... 311Steering .................................................... 312Off-Road Recovery .................................... 314Passing ..................................................... 314Loss of Control .......................................... 316Competitive Driving ................................... 317Off-Road Driving (Except SS) .................... 317Driving at Night ......................................... 333Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 334

City Driving ............................................... 338Freeway Driving ........................................ 339Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 340Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 341Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 342Winter Driving ........................................... 344If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .......................................... 348Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 348Recovery Hooks ........................................ 349Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 350Adding a Snow Plow or Similar

Equipment .............................................. 355Towing ........................................................ 356

Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 356Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 356Electronically Controlled Air Suspension

System .................................................. 361Towing a Trailer ........................................ 363

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

299

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 20.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

300

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the numberone contributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

301

According to the American Medical Association,a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end upwith a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The personwould reach the same BAC by drinking three4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixeddrinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) ofliquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.A person who consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage ofbody water than men. Since alcohol is carried inbody water, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of hersame body weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both Franceand Germany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

302

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driverhaving a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might notbe able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and driveor ride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or if youare with a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

303

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make yourvehicle go where you want it to go. They arethe brakes, the steering, and the accelerator.All three systems have to do their work atthe places where the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 382.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 204.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three secondsor more with another. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even inthree-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Thatcould be a lot of distance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between your vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

304

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not havetime to cool between hard stops. The brakeswill wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavybraking. If you keep pace with the traffic andallow realistic following distances, you willeliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.That means better braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while youare driving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harderto push down. If the engine stops, you will stillhave some power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist isused up, it may take longer to stop and the brakepedal will be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), an advanced electronic braking systemthat will help prevent a braking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to driveaway, ABS will check itself. You may hear amomentary motor or clicking noise while this testis going on. This is normal.

If there is a problemwith ABS, this warninglight will stay on.See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem WarningLight on page 205.

Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic RearProportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRPproblem, both the brake and ABS warning lights willcome on accompanied by a 10-second chime.The lights and chime will come on each time theignition is turned on until the problem is repaired.See your dealer for service.

305

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachfront wheel and at both rear wheels.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

306

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal oralways decrease stopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you, you will not havetime to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenlyslows or stops. Always leave enough room upahead to stop, even though you have ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.You may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may noticesome noise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

Locking Rear AxleIf your vehicle has this feature, your locking rearaxle can give you additional traction on snow, mud,ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard axlemost of the time, but when one of the rear wheelshas no traction and the other does, this feature willallow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle.

StabiliTrak® SystemYour vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®,Electronic Stability Control (ESC) which combinesantilock brake, traction and stability controlsystems and helps the driver maintain directionalcontrol of the vehicle in most driving conditions.

Traction control activates when the controllersenses wheel spin. StabiliTrak® will selectivelyapply the brakes and reduce engine torque to helpregain traction.

Stability control activates when the controllersenses a discrepancy between your intendedpath and the direction the vehicle is travelling.StabiliTrak® selectively applies braking pressure atany one of the vehicle’s brakes to help guidethe vehicle in the direction which you are steering.

When you first start your vehicle and begin to driveaway, the system performs several diagnosticchecks to insure there are no problems. You mayhear or feel the system working. This is normal anddoes not mean there is a problem with your vehicle.If driving conditions delay system initialization, theSTABILITRAK NOT READY message may bedisplayed. If this is the case, your vehicle does notneed servicing.

307

For more information on the stability messages,see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 220.

When the StabiliTrak®

system is both on andactively controllingthe stability of thevehicle, the StabiliTrak®

light will blink for theduration of the event.

You may also feel or hear the system working.This is normal.

The StabiliTrak® disablebutton is located on thetransmission shifthandle.

For vehicles with four-wheel drive, the StabiliTrak®

system is automatically disabled in 4LO modeand cannot be turned on until the vehicle isswitched to 2HI, 4HI, or 4AWD.

The StabiliTrak® system has three modes ofoperation: STABILITRAK ON, TRACTIONCONTROL OFF, and STABILITRAK OFF.

STABILITRAK ON -The vehicle will default toSTABILITRAK ON every time the driver starts thevehicle. The StabiliTrak® light will be off and noDIC messages will be displayed.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF - The driver canmodify the engine speed management system bymomentarily pressing the StabiliTrak® buttonon the transmission shift handle. The StabiliTrak®

light will come on and TRACTION CONTROLOFF will be displayed. For vehicles without a DIC,the StabiliTrak® indicator light will come on.Momentarily pressing the StabiliTrak® buttonagain will return the system to the STABILITRAKON mode.

STABILITRAK OFF - The driver can turn offStabiliTrak® by pressing the StabiliTrak® button formore than five seconds. The StabiliTrak® light willcome on and STABILITRAK OFF will be displayed.For vehicles without a DIC, the StabiliTrak®

indicator light will come on. Momentarily pressingthe StabiliTrak® button again will return the systemto the STABILITRAK ON mode. See StabiliTrak®

Off below for more information.

308

Traction Control OffIn this mode, stability control and brake-tractioncontrol are functional. Engine speed managementwill be modified and the driven wheels can spinmore freely. This can cause the brake-tractioncontrol to activate more frequently. If the controllerdetects excessive wheel spin in this mode, theStabiliTrak® indicator light may blink and theSTABILITRAK ACTIVE message may be displayedto warn the driver that damage may occur to thetransfer case.

StabiliTrak® OffIn this mode, both stability control and part of thetraction control system are disabled. Your vehiclewill still have brake-traction control, but will not beable to use the engine speed management system.You may still hear system noises as a result of thebrake-traction control coming on. If the controllerdetects excessive wheel spin in this mode, theStabiliTrak® indicator light may blink and theSTABILITRAK ACTIVE message may be displayedto warn the driver that damage may occur to thetransfer case.

It is recommended to leave the system on fornormal driving conditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck insand, mud, ice or snow, and you may wantto “rock” your vehicle in an attempt to free it. It mayalso be necessary to turn off the system whendriving in extreme off-road conditions where highwheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle isStuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 348 formore information.

For vehicles with four-wheel drive, when thetransfer case is in 4LO, the stability system isautomatically disabled. The StabiliTrak® light willcome on and the STABILITRAK OFF message willappear on the DIC. The StabiliTrak® systemcannot be turned on until the vehicle is switchedto 2HI, 4HI, or 4AWD.

309

The following chart describes the StabiliTrak® system events and the corresponding messages and lightsthat will be displayed on the instrument panel cluster.

Vehicles with a DIC Vehicles without a DICEventStabiliTrak®

Indicator Light DIC Message StabiliTrak®

Indicator LightStabiliTrak®

Service Light

Off None Off Off

StabiliTrak® On mode(System is fully enabled, but

is not actively controllingvehicle stability).

Solid Traction Control Off Solid Off Traction Control Off Mode

Solid StabiliTrak® Off Solid Off

StabiliTrak® Off Mode(StabiliTrak® indicator lightwill flash when system first

enters this mode).

Blinking StabiliTrak® Active Blinking Off

StabiliTrak® system activatesusing engine speed

management, brake tractioncontrol, and/or stability

control.

Solid Service StabiliTrak® Solid SolidStabiliTrak® system is

disabled due to asystem fault.

Solid StabiliTrak®

Not Ready Solid OffStabiliTrak® system is

disabled due to a failureto initialize.

310

Notice: If the StabiliTrak® light comes on dueto heavy braking and/or because the tractioncontrol system has been continuously active,do not allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spinexcessively. If you do, you may be causingdamage to the transfer case. This could lead tocostly repairs not covered by your warranty.

Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle tospin excessively while the StabiliTrak®, ABSand brake warning lights and the SERVICESTABILITRAK message are displayed, youcould damage the transfer case. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Reduceengine power and do not spin the wheel(s)excessively while these lights and this messageare displayed.

StabiliTrak® may activate on dry or rough roads orunder conditions such as heavy acceleration whileturning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts of thetransmission. When this happens, you may notice areduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise orvibration. This is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when thesystem activates, the StabiliTrak® light will blink,and the cruise control will automatically disengage.

When road conditions allow, you may re-engagethe cruise control. See Cruise Control on page 174.

StabiliTrak® will turn off automatically if a problemis detected in the system. The StabiliTrak®

light will come on and SERVICE STABILITRAKwill be displayed on the DIC. For vehicles without aDIC, the StabiliTrak® light and the StabiliTrak®

service light will both come on. If the SERVICESTABILITRAK message (or StabiliTrak® servicelight) does not clear itself after restarting thevehicle, you should see your dealer for service.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 382 for more information.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System(TrailBlazer SS)If your vehicle has this feature, engine power issent to all four wheels all the time.

This is like four-wheel drive, but there is noseparate lever or switch to engage or disengagethe front axle. It is fully automatic, and adjusts itselfas needed for road conditions.

311

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning,you can steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonablespeed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentionedon the news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface,the angle at which the curve is banked, andyour speed. While you are in a curve, speed isthe one factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — have todo their work where the tires meet the road.Adding the sudden acceleration can demand toomuch of those places. You can lose control.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle theway you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.


312

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you come overa hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a carsuddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child dartsout from between parked cars and stops right infront of you. You can avoid these problems bybraking — if you can stop in time. But sometimesyou cannot; there is not room. That is the time forevasive action — steering around the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes.

See Braking on page 304. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,and just as quickly straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

313

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn yoursteering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerousmove, since the passing vehicle occupies thesame lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenlyput the passing driver face to face with the worstof all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

314

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay yourpass. A broken center line usually indicates it isall right to pass, providing the road ahead isclear. Never cross a solid line on your side ofthe lane or a double solid line, even if the roadseems empty of approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces yourarea of vision, especially if you are following alarger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequatespace if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows orstops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the right laneand do not get too close. Time your move soyou will be increasing speed as the time comesto move into the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a running start that morethan makes up for the distance you would loseby dropping back. And if something happens tocause you to cancel your pass, you need onlyslow down and drop back again and wait foranother opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatyour vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror isconvex. The vehicle you just passed may seemto be farther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

315

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way youwant the vehicle to go. If you start steering quicklyenough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always beready for a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)helps avoid only the braking skid.

316

Competitive DrivingSee your warranty book before using your vehiclefor competitive driving. After reviewing yourwarranty book, please see the GM PerformanceParts website or catalog for parts and equipmentrequired for competitive driving.

Notice: If you use your vehicle for competitivedriving, the engine may use more oil than itwould with normal use. Low oil levels candamage the engine. Be sure to check the oillevel often during competitive driving and keepthe level at or near the upper mark that showsthe proper operating range on the engine oildipstick. For information on how to add oil,see Engine Oil on page 398.

Off-Road Driving (Except SS)This off-road guide is for vehicles that havefour-wheel drive. Also, see Braking on page 304.If your vehicle does not have four-wheel drive,you should not drive off-road unless you are ona level, solid surface.

Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does havesome definite hazards. The greatest of these isthe terrain itself.

“Off-roading” means you have left the great NorthAmerican road system behind. Traffic lanesare not marked. Curves are not banked. There areno road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough,uphill, or downhill. In short, you have goneright back to nature.

Off-road driving involves some new skills. And thatis why it is very important that you read thisguide. You will find many driving tips andsuggestions. These will help make your off-roaddriving safer and more enjoyable.

317

Before You Go Off-RoadingThere are some things to do before you go out.For example, be sure to have all necessarymaintenance and service work done. Check tomake sure all underbody shields, if the vehicle hasthem, are properly attached.

Be sure you read all the information about yourfour-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual.

Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fullyinflated? Are the fluid levels up where they shouldbe? What are the local laws that apply tooff-roading where you will be driving? If you do notknow, you should check with law enforcementpeople in the area. Will you be on someone’sprivate land? If so, be sure to get the necessarypermission.

Loading Your Vehicle for Off-RoadDriving

{CAUTION:

• Cargo on the load floor piled higherthan the seatbacks can be thrownforward during a sudden stop. You oryour passengers could be injured.Keep cargo below the top of theseatbacks.

• Unsecured cargo on the load floor canbe tossed about when driving overrough terrain. You or your passengerscan be struck by flying objects.Secure the cargo properly.

• Heavy loads on the roof raise thevehicle’s center of gravity, making itmore likely to roll over. You can beseriously or fatally injured if thevehicle rolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not on the roof.Keep cargo in the cargo area as farforward and low as possible.

318

There are some important things to rememberabout how to load your vehicle.

• The heaviest things should be on the loadfloor and forward of the rear axle. Putheavier items as far forward as you can.

• Be sure the load is secured properly, sodriving on the off-road terrain does nottoss things around.

You will find other important information in thismanual. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 350,Luggage Carrier on page 161, and Tires onpage 443.

Environmental ConcernsOff-road driving can provide wholesome andsatisfying recreation. However, it also raisesenvironmental concerns. We recognize theseconcerns and urge every off-roader to follow thesebasic rules for protecting the environment:

• Always use established trails, roads, and areasthat have been specially set aside for publicoff-road recreational driving; obey all postedregulations.

• Avoid any driving practice that could damagethe environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,grasses — or disturb wildlife. This includeswheel-spinning, breaking down trees, orunnecessary driving through streams or oversoft ground.

• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuseis removed from any campsite before leaving.

• Take extreme care with open fires wherepermitted, camp stoves, and lanterns.

• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or othercombustible materials that could catch fire fromthe heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.

319

Traveling to Remote AreasIt makes sense to plan your trip, especially whengoing to a remote area. Know the terrain and planyour route. You are much less likely to get badsurprises. Get accurate maps of trails and terrain.Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads.

It is also a good idea to travel with at leastone other vehicle. If something happens toone of them, the other can help quickly.

Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure toread the winch instructions. In a remote area, awinch can be handy if you get stuck. But you willwant to know how to use it properly.

Getting Familiar with Off-Road DrivingIt is a good idea to practice in an area that issafe and close to home before you go intothe wilderness. Off-road driving does require somenew and different skills. Here is what we mean.

Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Youreyes, for example, need to constantly sweep theterrain for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need tolisten for unusual tire or engine sounds. With yourarms, hands, feet, and body, you will need torespond to vibrations and vehicle bounce.

Controlling your vehicle is the key to successfuloff-road driving. One of the best ways to controlyour vehicle is to control your speed. Here aresome things to keep in mind. At higher speeds:

• You approach things faster and you have lesstime to scan the terrain for obstacles.

• You have less time to react.

• You have more vehicle bounce when you driveover obstacles.

• You will need more distance for braking,especially since you are on an unpavedsurface.

{CAUTION:

When you are driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in direction can easilythrow you out of position. This could causeyou to lose control and crash. So, whetheryou are driving on or off the road, you andyour passengers should wear safety belts.

320

Scanning the TerrainOff-road driving can take you over many differentkinds of terrain. You need to be familiar withthe terrain and its many different features.Here are some things to consider.

Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take youover hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,mud, snow, or ice. Each of these surfacesaffects the steering, acceleration, and braking ofyour vehicle in different ways. Depending upon thekind of surface you are on, you may experienceslipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayedacceleration, poor traction, and longer brakingdistances.

Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstaclescan be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, orbump can startle you if you are not prepared forthem. Often these obstacles are hidden bygrass, bushes, snow, or even the rise and fall ofthe terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:

• Is the path ahead clear?

• Will the surface texture change abruptlyup ahead?

• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?There is more discussion of these subjectslater.

• Will you have to stop suddenly or changedirection quickly?

When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain,keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts,troughs, or other surface features can jerk thewheel out of your hands if you are not prepared.

When you drive over bumps, rocks, or otherobstacles, the wheels can leave the ground.If this happens, even with one or two wheels,you cannot control the vehicle as well or at all.

321

Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it isespecially important to avoid sudden acceleration,sudden turns, or sudden braking.

In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind ofalertness from driving on paved roads andhighways. There are no road signs, posted speedlimits, or signal lights. You have to use your owngood judgment about what is safe and what is not.

Drinking and driving can be very dangerous onany road. And this is certainly true for off-roaddriving. At the very time you need special alertnessand driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions,and judgment can be affected by even a smallamount of alcohol. You could have a serious — oreven fatal — accident if you drink and drive orride with a driver who has been drinking.See Drunken Driving on page 301.

Driving on Off-Road HillsOff-road driving often takes you up, down, oracross a hill. Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and an understanding of what yourvehicle can and cannot do. There are some hillsthat simply cannot be driven, no matter howwell built the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Many hills are simply too steep for anyvehicle. If you drive up them, you will stall.If you drive down them, you cannot controlyour speed. If you drive across them, youwill roll over. You could be seriouslyinjured or killed. If you have any doubtabout the steepness, do not drive the hill.

322

Approaching a HillWhen you approach a hill, you need to decide if it isone of those hills that is just too steep to climb,descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge.On a very small hill, for example, there may be asmooth, constant incline with only a small change inelevation where you can easily see all the way tothe top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeperas you near the top, but you may not see thisbecause the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes,grass, or shrubs.

Here are some other things to consider as youapproach a hill.

• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill getsharply steeper in places?

• Is there good traction on the hillside, or willthe surface cause tire slipping?

• Is there a straight path up or down the hill soyou will not have to make turning maneuvers?

• Are there obstructions on the hill that canblock your path, such as boulders, trees, logs,or ruts?

• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, anembankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get outand walk the hill if you do not know. It is thesmart way to find out.

• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills oftenhave ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposedrocks because they are more susceptible tothe effects of erosion.

323

Driving UphillOnce you decide you can safely drive up the hill,you need to take some special steps.

• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on thesteering wheel.

• Get a smooth start up the hill and try tomaintain your speed. Do not use more powerthan you need, because you do not wantthe wheels to start spinning or sliding.

• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.If the path twists and turns, you might want tofind another route.

{CAUTION:

Turning or driving across steep hills canbe dangerous. You could lose traction,slide sideways, and possibly roll over.You could be seriously injured or killed.When driving up hills, always try to gostraight up.

• Ease up on your speed as you approach thetop of the hill.

• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you morevisible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.

• Sound the horn as you approach the top of thehill to let opposing traffic know you are there.

• Use your headlamps even during the day.They make you more visible to oncoming traffic.

{CAUTION:

Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at fullspeed can cause an accident. There couldbe a drop-off, embankment, cliff, or evenanother vehicle. You could be seriouslyinjured or killed. As you near the top of ahill, slow down and stay alert.

324

Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls,or is about to stall, and I cannot make itup the hill?

A: If this happens, there are some things youshould do, and there are some things youmust not do. First, here is what you should do:

• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle andkeep it from rolling backwards. Also, applythe parking brake.

• If the engine is still running, shift thetransmission to REVERSE (R), releasethe parking brake, and slowly back downthe hill in REVERSE (R).

• If the engine has stopped running, you willneed to restart it. With the brake pedalpressed and the parking brake still applied,shift the transmission to PARK (P) and restartthe engine. Then, shift to REVERSE (R),release the parking brake, and slowly backdown the hill as straight as possible inREVERSE (R).

• As you are backing down the hill, put your lefthand on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clockposition. This way, you will be able to tell if thewheels are straight and maneuver as youback down. It is best that you back down thehill with the wheels straight rather than inthe left or right direction. Turning the wheeltoo far to the left or right will increase thepossibility of a rollover.

Here are some things you must not do if you stall,or are about to stall, when going up a hill.• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting

into NEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engine andregain forward momentum. This will not work.Your vehicle will roll backwards very quicklyand you could go out of control.Instead, apply the regular brake to stop thevehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift toREVERSE (R), release the parking brake,and slowly back straight down.

• Never attempt to turn around if you are aboutto stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steepenough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enoughto cause you to roll over if you turn around.If you cannot make it up the hill, you must backstraight down the hill.

325

Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back downthe hill and decide I just cannot do it.What should I do?

A: Set the parking brake, put the transmission inPARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave thevehicle and go get some help. Exit on theuphill side and stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if it rolled downhill. Do notshift the transfer case to NEUTRAL whenyou leave the vehicle. Leave it in some gear.

{CAUTION:

Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRALcan cause your vehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in PARK (P). This isbecause the NEUTRAL position on thetransfer case overrides the transmission.You or someone else could be injured.If you are going to leave your vehicle,set the parking brake and shift thetransmission to PARK (P). But do not shiftthe transfer case to NEUTRAL. Leave thetransfer case in the Two-Wheel High,Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel Lowposition.

326

Driving DownhillWhen off-roading takes you downhill, you will wantto consider a number of things:

• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able tomaintain vehicle control?

• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?

• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts?Logs? Boulders?

• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there ahidden creek bank or even a river bottomwith large rocks?

If you decide you can go down a hill safely, thentry to keep your vehicle headed straight down, anduse a low gear. This way, engine drag can helpthe brakes and they will not have to do allthe work. Descend slowly, keeping your vehicleunder control at all times.

{CAUTION:

Heavy braking when going down a hill cancause your brakes to overheat and fade.This could cause loss of control and aserious accident. Apply the brakes lightlywhen descending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed under control.

327

Q: Are there some things I should not dowhen driving down a hill?

A: Yes! These are important because if youignore them you could lose control andhave a serious accident.

• When driving downhill, avoid turns that takeyou across the incline of the hill. A hill thatis not too steep to drive down may betoo steep to drive across. You could roll overif you do not drive straight down.

• Never go downhill with the transmission inNEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.”The brakes will have to do all the workand could overheat and fade.

Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?

A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill.But if it happens going downhill, here is whatto do.

1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regularbrakes. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking,restart the engine.

3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parkingbrake, and drive straight down.

4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.

328

Driving Across an InclineSooner or later, an off-road trail will probably goacross the incline of a hill. If this happens,you have to decide whether to try to drive acrossthe incline. Here are some things to consider:

• A hill that can be driven straight up or downmay be too steep to drive across. When you gostraight up or down a hill, the length of thewheel base — the distance from the frontwheels to the rear wheels — reduces thelikelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end.But when you drive across an incline, the muchmore narrow track width — the distancebetween the left and right wheels — may notprevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.Also, driving across an incline puts more weighton the downhill wheels. This could cause adownhill slide or a rollover.

• Surface conditions can be a problem when youdrive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots,or even wet grass can cause the tires to slipsideways, downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit something that willtrip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.

• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness ofthe incline even worse. If you drive across arock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhillwheels drop into a rut or depression, yourvehicle can tilt even more.

For reasons like these, you need to decidecarefully whether to try to drive across an incline.Just because the trail goes across the inclinedoes not mean you have to drive it. The lastvehicle to try it might have rolled over.

{CAUTION:

Driving across an incline that is too steepwill make your vehicle roll over. You couldbe seriously injured or killed. If you haveany doubt about the steepness of theincline, do not drive across it. Find anotherroute instead.

329

Q: What if I am driving across an incline thatis not too steep, but I hit some loosegravel and start to slide downhill.What should I do?

A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slidesideways, turn downhill. This should helpstraighten out the vehicle and prevent the sideslipping. However, a much better way toprevent this is to get out and “walk the course”so you know what the surface is like beforeyou drive it.

Stalling on an InclineIf your vehicle stalls when you are crossing anincline, be sure you, and any passengers, get outon the uphill side, even if the door there isharder to open. If you get out on the downhill sideand the vehicle starts to roll over, you will beright in its path.

If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of thepath the vehicle will take if it does roll over.

{CAUTION:

Getting out on the downhill (low) side of avehicle stopped across an incline isdangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, youcould be crushed or killed. Always get outon the uphill (high) side of the vehicle andstay well clear of the rollover path.

330

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or IceWhen you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheelswill not get good traction. You cannot accelerateas quickly, turning is more difficult, and youwill need longer braking distances.

It is best to use a low gear when you are inmud — the deeper the mud, the lower the gear.In really deep mud, the idea is to keep your vehiclemoving so you do not get stuck.

When you drive on sand, you will sense a changein wheel traction. But it will depend upon howloosely packed the sand is. On loosely packedsand, such as on beaches or sand dunes, the tireswill tend to sink into the sand. This has an effecton steering, accelerating, and braking. Driveat a reduced speed and avoid sharp turnsor abrupt maneuvers.

Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tiretraction. On these surfaces, it is very easy to losecontrol. On wet ice, for example, the traction is sopoor that you will have difficulty accelerating. And ifyou do get moving, poor steering and difficultbraking can cause you to slide out of control.

{CAUTION:

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or riverscan be dangerous. Underwater springs,currents under the ice, or sudden thawscan weaken the ice. Your vehicle couldfall through the ice and you and yourpassengers could drown. Drive yourvehicle on safe surfaces only.

331

Driving in WaterHeavy rain can mean flash flooding, and floodwaters demand extreme caution.

Find out how deep the water is before you drivethrough it. If it is deep enough to cover the wheelhubs, axles, or exhaust pipe, do not try it — youprobably will not get through. Also, water that deepcan damage the axle and other vehicle parts.

If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.At faster speeds, water splashes on the ignitionsystem and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can alsooccur if you get the tailpipe under water. And,as long as the tailpipe is under water, youwill never be able to start the engine. When yougo through water, remember that when the brakesget wet, it may take you longer to stop.

{CAUTION:

Driving through rushing water can bedangerous. Deep water can sweep yourvehicle downstream and you and yourpassengers could drown. If it is onlyshallow water, it can still wash away theground from under your tires, and youcould lose traction and roll the vehicleover. Do not drive through rushing water.

See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 334for more information on driving through water.

332

After Off-Road DrivingRemove any brush or debris that has collectedon the underbody, chassis, or under the hood.These accumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand, have the brakelinings cleaned and checked. These substancescan cause glazing and uneven braking. Check thebody structure, steering, suspension, wheels,tires, and exhaust system for damage. Also, checkthe fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage.

Your vehicle will require more frequent servicedue to off-road use. Refer to the MaintenanceSchedule for additional information.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

333

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble.On a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate,or turn as well because your tire-to-roadtraction is not as good as on dry roads.

334

And, if your tires do not have much tread left,you will get even less traction. It is always wise togo slower and be cautious if rain starts to fallwhile you are driving. The surface may get wetsuddenly when your reflexes are tuned for drivingon dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your wiping equipment ingood shape and keep your windshield washer fluidreservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signs ofstreaking or missing areas on the windshield,or when strips of rubber start to separate fromthe inserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply your brake pedallightly until your brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try toslow down before you hit them.

335

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it canif your tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through your engine’s air intake andbadly damage your engine. Never drive throughwater that is slightly lower than the underbodyof your vehicle. If you cannot avoid deeppuddles or standing water, drive through themvery slowly.

336

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carriedaway. As little as six inches of flowingwater can carry away a smaller vehicle.If this happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignorepolice warning signs, and otherwisebe very cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 443.

337

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 339.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corneris busy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

338

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

339

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted.

Reduce your speed according to yourspeedometer, not to your sense of motion.After driving for any distance at higher speeds,you may tend to think you are going slower thanyou actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — such asafter a day’s work — do not plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before starting out.Of course, you will find experienced and ableservice experts in GM dealerships all acrossNorth America. They will be ready and willing tohelp if you need it.

340

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, witha comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your mirrors and yourinstruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

341

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.See Off-Road Driving (Except SS) on page 317for information about driving off-road.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check allfluid levels and also the brakes, tires, coolingsystem, and transmission. These parts canwork hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.

342

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transmission, and you canclimb the hill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert.There could be something in your lane, like astalled car or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

343

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 443.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag,some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, aflashlight, a red cloth, and reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, apiece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags tohelp provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

344

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragiletraction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheelswill spin and polish the surface under the tireseven more.

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 305.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice.On an otherwise clear road, ice patches mayappear in shaded areas where the sun cannotreach, such as around clumps of trees, behindbuildings, or under bridges. Sometimes thesurface of a curve or an overpass may remainicy when the surrounding roads are clear. If yousee a patch of ice ahead of you, brake beforeyou are on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

345

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap around yourselfor tuck under your clothing to keep warm. You can run the engine to keep warm, but be

careful.

346

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, so you mightnot know it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blockingyour exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snowdoes not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must.This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make itgo a little faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heatthat you get and it keeps the battery charged.You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do itas little as possible. Preserve the fuel as longas you can. To help keep warm, you can get outof the vehicle and do some fairly vigorousexercises every half hour or so until help comes.

347

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,you will need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you or otherscould be injured. And, the transmission orother parts of the vehicle can overheat.That could cause an engine compartmentfire or other damage. When you are stuck,spin the wheels as little as possible. Do notspin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) asshown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroyparts of your vehicle as well as the tires.If you spin the wheels too fast while shiftingthe transmission back and forth, you candestroy the transmission.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 468.

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, shift intoFour-Wheel High. Turn the StabiliTrak® System off.See StabiliTrak® System on page 307. Then shiftback and forth between REVERSE (R) and aforward gear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. Release the accelerator pedal while youshift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions,you will cause a rocking motion that may free yourvehicle. If that does not get your vehicle out after afew tries, it may need to be towed out. Or, you canuse the recovery hooks if your vehicle has them.If your vehicle does need to be towed out, seeTowing Your Vehicle on page 356.

348

Recovery Hooks

{CAUTION:

These hooks, when used, are under a lotof force. Always pull the vehicle straightout. Never pull on the hooks at asideways angle. The hooks could breakoff and you or others could be injuredfrom the chain or cable snapping back.

Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow thevehicle. Your vehicle could be damagedand it would not be covered by warranty.

Your vehicle may have recovery hooks at the frontof the vehicle. You may need to use them if you’restuck off-road and need to be pulled to some placewhere you can continue driving.

349

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weightyour vehicle can carry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight and includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show howmuch weight it was designed to carry, the Tireand Loading Information label and theCertification/Tire label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar).With the driver’s door open, you will find thelabel attached below the door lock post (striker).The tire and loading information label showsthe number of occupant seating positions (A),and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

Label Example

350

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 443 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 452.

There is also important loading information on thevehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) andthe Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for thefront and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label”later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle. See Towinga Trailer on page 363 for important informationon towing a trailer, towing safety rules andtrailering tips.

351

Item Description Total

A Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtractOccupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)




750 lbs (136 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

352




1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’scapacity weight and seating positions. Thecombined weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’scapacity weight.

Your vehicle may have an electronically controlledair suspension system that automatically keepsyour vehicle level as you load and unload yourvehicle. See Electronically Controlled AirSuspension System on page 361 for additionalinformation.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found onthe rear edge of the driver’s door. The label showsthe size of your vehicle’s original tires and theinflation pressures needed to obtain the grossweight capacity of your vehicle. This is calledGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).

Example 3

353

The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, cargo, and trailer tongue weight,if pulling a trailer.

The Certification/Tire label also tells you themaximum weights for the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).To find out the actual loads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weigh station andweigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out your load equally onboth sides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or theGAWR for either the front or rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load, you shouldspread it out.

Similar appearing vehicles may have differentGVWRs and capacity weights. Please note yourvehicle’s Certification/Tire label or consultyour dealer for additional details.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Using heavier suspension components to getadded durability might not change your vehicle’sweight ratings. Ask your dealer to help youload your vehicle the right way.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

354

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anythingelse — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

There is also important loading information foroff-road driving in this manual. See “Loading YourVehicle for Off-Road Driving” under Off-RoadDriving (Except SS) on page 317.

Adding a Snow Plow or SimilarEquipmentYour vehicle was neither designed nor intendedfor a snow plow.

Notice: Adding a snow plow or similarequipment to your vehicle can damage it, andthe repairs would not be covered by warranty.Do not install a snow plow or similarequipment on your vehicle.

355

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 542.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment,many vehicles can be towed in these ways.See “Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.You may also need brakes for the vehicle beingtowed. See your dealer for additional traileringinformation.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the trailering capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan be towed.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leaving ona Long Trip on page 340.

356

All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles(TrailBlazer SS)Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle withall four wheels on the ground, or even with onlytwo of its wheels on the ground, will damagedrivetrain components. Do not tow anall-wheel-drive vehicle if any of its wheels willbe on the ground.

Your vehicle was not designed to be towed withany of its wheels on the ground. If your vehiclemust be towed, see “Towing Your Vehicle” earlierin this section.

Dinghy TowingTwo-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Do not tow your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towedwith all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drivetransmissions have no provisions for internallubrication while being towed. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed on a platform trailer.

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Four-wheel-drive vehicles can be dinghy towed ifyou follow the proper procedures. The transmissionhas no provisions for internal lubrication while beingtowed, so it is important that you follow all the stepslisted in this manual to dinghy tow yourfour-wheel-drive vehicle.

357

Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:

1. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).

2. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.

4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to thetow vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’stransfer case into NEUTRAL can causeyour vehicle to roll even if the transmissionis in PARK (P). You or others could beinjured. Make sure the parking brake isfirmly set before you shift the transfer caseto NEUTRAL.

5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N).See Four-Wheel Drive on page 122 forthe proper procedure to select theNEUTRAL (N) position for your vehicle.

6. Release the parking brake only after thevehicle being towed is firmly attached tothe towing vehicle.

7. Turn the ignition off.

After towing, see “Shifting Out of Neutral” underFour-Wheel Drive on page 122.

Dolly TowingFront Towing(Front Wheels Off the Ground)

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehiclewith the rear wheels on the ground, thetransmission could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Never tow your vehicle with the rear wheels onthe ground.

358

Four-Wheel-Drive VehiclesFour-wheel-drive vehicles can be dolly towed withthe rear wheels on the ground.

Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:

1. Drive the vehicle onto the tow dolly.

2. Shift the automatic transmission to PARK (P).

3. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.

4. Firmly set the parking brake.

5. Securely attach the vehicle being towed tothe dolly.

{CAUTION:

Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’stransfer case into NEUTRAL can causeyour vehicle to roll even if the transmissionis in PARK (P). You or others could beinjured. Make sure the parking brake isfirmly set before you shift the transfer caseto NEUTRAL.

6. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N).See Four-Wheel Drive on page 122 forthe proper procedure to select theNEUTRAL (N) position for your vehicle.


8. Turn the ignition off.

After towing, see “Shifting Out of Neutral” underFour-Wheel Drive on page 122.

359

Rear Towing(Rear Wheels Off the Ground)(Two-Wheel or Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)

Use the following procedure to tow your vehiclefrom the rear:

1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.

2. Firmly set the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 126 for more information.

3. Shift the transmission in PARK (P).

4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions toattach and secure the vehicle being towed tothe dolly and then the loaded dolly to thetow vehicle. Use an adequate clamping deviceto ensure that the front wheels are lockedinto the straight position.


6. Turn the ignition to LOCK.If the tow vehicle will not be started or drivenfor six weeks or more, remove the batterycable from the negative terminal (post) of thebattery.

360

Electronically Controlled AirSuspension SystemYour vehicle may be equipped with anelectronically controlled air suspension systemthat automatically keeps your vehicle level asyou load and unload. The system includesa compressor, two height sensors and two airsprings supporting the rear axle.

The system also has an internal clock to preventoverheating if the inflator is used for prolongedperiods. If the system overheats, all levelingfunction stops until the system cools down.During this time, the indicator light on the airinflator switch will be flashing.

The ignition has to be on for the system to inflate,in order to raise the vehicle to the standard rideheight after loading. The system can lowerthe vehicle to the standard ride height afterunloading with the ignition on and also for up to30 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.

You may hear the compressor operating when youload your vehicle, and periodically as the systemadjusts the vehicle to the standard ride height.

Load leveling will not function normally with theinflator hose attached to the inflator outlet. Removethe inflator hose from the outlet during loadingand unloading.If the vehicle is parked for an extended period oftime, some bleed down of the suspension isnormal. Upon starting the vehicle, proper heightwill be achieved.

361

Overload ProtectionThe air suspension system is equipped withoverload protection. Overload protection isdesigned to protect the air suspension system,and it is an indicator to the driver that the vehicleis overloaded. When the overload protectionmode is on, it will not allow damage to theair compressor. However, do not overload thevehicle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 350.

If the suspension remains at a low height, the rearaxle load has exceeded GAWR (Gross AxleWeight Rating). When the overload protectionmode is activated, the compressor operatesfor about 30 seconds to one minute without raisingthe vehicle depending on the amount of overload.This will continue each time the ignition is turned onuntil the rear axle load is reduced below GAWR.

Indicator LightThe indicator light on the inflator switch in the rearpassenger compartment also serves as anindicator for internal system error. If the indicatorlight is flashing without the load leveling functionor the inflator being active, turn off the ignition.The next day turn on the ignition and checkthe indicator light. The vehicle can be driven withthe light flashing, but if it is you should havethe vehicle serviced as soon as possible.

362

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.You may also damage your vehicle; theresulting repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Pull a trailer only if youhave followed all the steps in this section.Ask your dealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly candamage your vehicle and result in costly repairsthat would not be covered by your warranty.Always follow the instructions in this sectionand check with your dealer for more informationabout towing a trailer with your vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle,you should read the information in “Weight ofthe Trailer” that appears later in this section.

Trailering is different than just driving your vehicleby itself. Trailering means changes in acceleration,braking, handling, durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

363

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you’ll be driving.A good source for this information can be stateor provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches”later in this section.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven.Your engine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) thatyou tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.This helps your engine and other parts ofyour vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want toshift the transmission to THIRD (3) or, ifnecessary, a lower gear selection if thetransmission shifts too often (e.g., under heavyloads and/or hilly conditions).

Three important considerations have to do withweight:

• the weight of the trailer,

• the weight of the trailer tongue

• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how you plan to use your rig.For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is usedto pull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that you have on yourvehicle, and the amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of the TrailerTongue” later in this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo in the tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

364

Look in the following chart to find the maximum trailer weight for your vehicle.

Vehicle Axle Ratio Max.Trailer Wt. *GCWR

2WD TrailBlazer (L6 Engine)

3.42 5,400 lbs (2 449 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)

3.73 5,900 lbs (2 676 kg) 10,500 lbs (4 763 kg)

4.10 6,400 lbs (2 903 kg) 11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)

4WD TrailBlazer (L6 Engine)

3.42 5,200 lbs (2 359 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)

3.73 5,700 lbs (2 585 kg) 10,500 lbs (4 763 kg)

4.10 6,200 lbs (2 812 kg) 11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)

2WD TrailBlazer (V8 Engine)3.42 6,300 lbs (2 858 kg) 11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)

3.73 6,800 lbs (3 084 kg) 11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)

4WD TrailBlazer (V8 Engine)3.42 6,100 lbs (2 767 kg) 11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)

3.73 6,600 lbs (2 994 kg) 11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)

**2WD TrailBlazer SS (6.0 L V8 Engine) 4.10 6,800 lbs (3 084 kg) 11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)

**AWD TrailBlazer SS (6.0 L V8 Engine) 4.10 6,600 lbs (2 994 kg) 11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loadedvehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversion. The GCWR for yourvehicle should not be exceeded.

**TrailBlazer SS models with the 6.0L engine require Performance Sport Package (B4U).

365

You can ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice, or you can write us at theaddress listed in your Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information Booklet.

In Canada, write to:General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the total orgross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and thepeople who will be riding in the vehicle. If you havea lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo inyour vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight yourvehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailerweight your vehicle can tow. And if you will tow atrailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW

because your vehicle will be carrying that weight,too. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 350 formore information about your vehicle’s maximumload capacity.

The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percentto 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up toa maximum or 400 lbs (181 kg) with a weightcarrying hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) shouldbe 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight, up to a maximum of 900 lbs (408 kg)with a weight distributing hitch.

366

Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongueweight for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitch ball closestto the vehicle. This will help reduce the effectof trailer tongue weight on the rear axle.After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be ableto get them right simply by moving some itemsaround in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability tocarry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross VehicleWeight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). The effect of additional weight mayreduce your trailering capacity more than the totalof the additional weight.

Consider the following example:

A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the frontaxle and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle.

It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg),a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and aGCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:

You can expect tongue weight to be at least10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) andbecause the weight is applied well behind the rearaxle, the effect on the rear axle will be greater thanjust the weight itself, as much as 1.5 times as much.The weight at the rear axle could be 850 lbs(386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the rearaxle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs(1 803 kg). This is very close to, but within the limitfor RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailer upto 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).

367

But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped withsome of the latest options and you have a frontseat passenger and two rear seat passengers withsome luggage and gear in the vehicle as well.You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the frontaxle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axleweight. Your vehicle now weighs:

Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and youmay think that you should subtract 700 additionalpounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacity tostay within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailerwould only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may gofurther and think you must limit tongue weight toless than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid exceedingGVWR. But, you must still consider the effect onthe rear axle. Because your rear axle now weighs3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs(408 kg) on the rear axle without exceeding

RGAWR. The effect of tongue weight is about1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs(408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with being able tohandle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight.Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent oftotal loaded trailer weight, you can expect that thelargest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).

It is important that you make sure your vehicledoes not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Ratingor Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure youare not exceeding any of these ratings is to weighyour vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to theupper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numberson the Certification label at the rear edge of thedriver’s door. See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 350 for more information. Then be sure youdon’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,or the GAWR, including the weight of the trailertongue. If you use a weight distributing hitch, makesure you don’t go over the rear axle limit beforeyou apply the weight distribution spring bars.

368

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roadsare a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.

Weight Distributing Hitches and WeightCarrying Hitches

When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitchmust be adjusted so the distance remains thesame both before and after coupling the trailer tothe tow vehicle.

If you use a step-bumper hitch, the bumper couldbe damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there isample room when turning to avoid contact betweenthe trailer and the bumper.

If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded,will weigh more than 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) be sureto use a properly mounted weight-distributinghitch and sway control of the proper size.This equipment is very important for propervehicle loading and good handling when driving.Always use a sway control if the trailer willweigh more than these limits. You can ask a hitchdealer about sway controls.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer to helpprevent the tongue from contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch. Instructionsabout safety chains may be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation forattaching safety chains and do not attach them tothe bumper. Always leave just enough slack soyou can turn with your rig. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

(A) Body to Ground Distance, (B) Front of Vehicle

369

Trailer BrakesIf your trailer weighs more than 1,500 lbs (680 kg)loaded, then it needs its own brakes — andthey must be adequate. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll beable to install, adjust and maintain them properly.

Your trailer’s brake system can tap into thevehicle’s hydraulic brake system only if:

• The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi(20 650 kPa) of pressure.

• The trailer’s brake system will use less than0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from yourvehicle’s master cylinder. Otherwise,both braking systems won’t work well.You could even lose your brakes.

If everything checks out this far, then make thebrake fluid tap at the port on the master cylinderthat sends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’tuse copper tubing for this. If you do, it will bendand finally break off. Use steel brake tubing.

Driving with a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you have a rear-most window open andyou pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbonmonoxide (CO) could come into yourvehicle. You can not see or smell CO.It can cause unconsciousness or death.See Engine Exhaust on page 130.To maximize your safety when towing atrailer:

• Have your exhaust system inspectedfor leaks and make necessary repairsbefore starting on your trip.

• Keep the rear-most windows closed.


370


• If exhaust does come into your vehiclethrough a window in the rear oranother opening, drive with your front,main heating or cooling system onand with the fan on any speed.This will bring fresh, outside air intoyour vehicle. Do not use the climatecontrol setting for maximum airbecause it only recirculates the airinside your vehicle. See Dual ClimateControl System on page 185 or DualAutomatic Climate Control System onpage 188.

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connection,lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start your vehicle andtrailer moving and then apply the trailer brakecontroller by hand to be sure the brakes areworking. This lets you check your electricalconnection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

371

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re agood deal longer, you’ll need to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle before you canreturn to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel withone hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,just move that hand to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making TurnsNotice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailerwon’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerThe arrows on your instrument panel willflash whenever you signal a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will alsoflash, telling other drivers you’re about toturn, change lanes or stop.

372

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if thebulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you maythink drivers behind you are seeing your signalwhen they are not. It’s important to checkoccasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs arestill working.

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforeyou start down a long or steep downgrade. If youdon’t shift down, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shiftthe transmission to THIRD (3) or a lower gear,under heavy loads or hilly conditions.

When towing at high altitude on steep uphillgrades, consider the following: Engine coolant willboil at a lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If you turn your engine off immediatelyafter towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,your vehicle may show signs similar to engineoverheating. To avoid this, let the engine runwhile parked (preferably on level ground) withthe automatic transmission in PARK (P) fora few minutes before turning the engine off.If you do get the overheat warning, see EngineOverheating on page 414.

373

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer attached, on a hill. If somethinggoes wrong, your rig could start to move.People can be injured, and both yourvehicle and the trailer can be damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,here’s how to do it:1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into

PARK (P) yet. When parking uphill, turn yourwheels away from the curb. When parkingdownhill, turn your wheels into the curb.

2. Have someone place chocks behind the trailerwheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, releasethe regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake, and then shift into PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.

If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehiclewill not move, even when you are on fairlylevel ground, use the steps that follow.

Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set.

If the transfer case on four-wheel drivevehicles is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle willbe free to roll, even if your shift lever is inPARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case isin a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL.

See Four-Wheel Drive on page 122.

374

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you:

• start your engine,

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of thechocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and storethe chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou’re pulling a trailer. See the MaintenanceSchedule for more on this. Things that areespecially important in trailer operation areautomatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill), engineoil, axle lubricant, belt(s), cooling system andbrake system. Each of these is covered inthis manual, and the Index will help you find themquickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea toreview these sections before you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nutsand bolts are tight.

375

Trailer Wiring Harness

Your vehicle may have a seven-wire trailer towingharness. This harness may have a seven-pinuniversal heavy-duty trailer connector (if equippedwith the trailering package) that is attached to abracket on the hitch platform or included with thefour-pin trailer towing harness. If your vehicle is notequipped with the heavy-duty trailer connector,you may purchase one from your dealer.

The seven-wire harness contains the followingtrailer circuits:

• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal

• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal

• Brown: Running Lamps

• White: Ground

• Light Green: Back-up Lamps

• Dark Blue: Electric Brakes

• Red: Battery Feed (The chassis wiring ringterminal must be fastened to a stud on theunderhood electrical center before the trailerfeed will become active.)

376

If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with astandard four-way round pin connector, an adapterconnector is available from your dealer.

If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery,turn on the headlamps to boost the vehiclesystem voltage and properly charge the battery.

Your vehicle is also equipped with wiring for anelectric trailer brake controller. These wires arelocated inside the vehicle on the driver’s side underthe instrument panel. These wires should beconnected to an electric trailer brake controller byyour dealer or a qualified service center.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a four-pintrailer towing harness. This harness has a four-pintrailer connector that contains the followingtrailer circuits:

• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal

• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal

• Brown: Running Lamps

• White: Ground

This harness also contains the following trailercircuits that are not connected to the four-pin trailerconnector:

• Light Green: Back-Up Lamps

• Dark Blue: Electric Brakes

• Red: Battery Feed

If your vehicle is a TrailBlazer SS, you wereprovided with a trailer wiring harness extension,and instructions for installing this extension, whenyour vehicle was delivered. This extension willallow your vehicle’s trailer wiring harness tobe more easily accessible. There is a four-wayconnector on the harness. A seven-way adapterplug is also included if your trailer requires it.

377

✍ NOTES

378

Service ........................................................ 382Accessories and Modifications ................... 382California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 383Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 383Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ...................................... 384Fuel ............................................................. 384

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 384Gasoline Specifications .............................. 385California Fuel ........................................... 385Additives ................................................... 385Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 386Filling the Tank ......................................... 387Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 389

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 390Hood Release ........................................... 390Engine Compartment Overview .................. 392Engine Oil ................................................. 398Engine Oil Life System .............................. 404Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 406Automatic Transmission Fluid .................... 407

Engine Coolant .......................................... 411Radiator Pressure Cap .............................. 414Engine Overheating ................................... 414Cooling System ......................................... 416Engine Fan Noise ..................................... 422Power Steering Fluid ................................. 422Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 423Brakes ...................................................... 424Battery ...................................................... 428Jump Starting ............................................ 429

All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 434Rear Axle .................................................... 434Four-Wheel Drive ........................................ 435Front Axle ................................................... 436Bulb Replacement ....................................... 437

Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 437Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps ............. 438License Plate Lamp ................................... 439Replacement Bulbs ................................... 439

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 440

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

379

Tires ............................................................ 443Winter Tires .............................................. 444Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 445Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 449Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 452High-Speed Operation ............................... 454Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 455Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 460When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 462Buying New Tires ...................................... 462Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 464Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 465Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 466Wheel Replacement .................................. 467Tire Chains ............................................... 468Accessory Inflator ...................................... 469If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 471Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 472Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 473Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire ....................................... 477Secondary Latch System ........................... 482

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 486Spare Tire ................................................. 489

Appearance Care ........................................ 489Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 489Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 491Leather ...................................................... 492Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 492Care of Safety Belts .................................. 493Weatherstrips ............................................ 493Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 493Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 494Finish Care ............................................... 494Windshield, Backglass, and

Wiper Blades ......................................... 495Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 495Tires ......................................................... 496Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 496Finish Damage .......................................... 496Underbody Maintenance ............................ 497Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 497Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 498


380

Vehicle Identification .................................. 499Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 499Service Parts Identification Label ............... 499

Electrical System ........................................ 500Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 500Headlamps ................................................ 500Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 500

Power Windows and Other PowerOptions .................................................. 500

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 501Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 501Rear Underseat Fuse Block ....................... 507

Capacities and Specifications .................... 510


381

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control andstability control. Some of these accessories mayeven cause malfunction or damage not coveredby warranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories. When you go toyour GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine GM Accessories.

382

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.



• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 555.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 88.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 532.

383

Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an importantpart of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.To help keep your engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, GM recommendsthe use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline.

The 8th digit of your Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) shows the code letter or numberthat identifies your engine. You will find the VINat the top left of the instrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) on page 499.

Gasoline OctaneIf your vehicle has the 4.2L L6 engine (VIN Code S)or the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code M), use regularunleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,you may notice an audible knocking noise whenyou drive, commonly referred to as spark knock.If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible. If you are usinggasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hearheavy knocking, your engine needs service.

If your vehicle has the 6.0L V8 engine(VIN Code H), use premium unleaded gasolinewith a posted octane rating of 91 or higher. Youmay also use regular unleaded gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s accelerationmay be slightly reduced, and you may notice aslight audible knocking noise, commonly referred toas spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, youmay notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive.If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you mightdamage your engine. If you are using gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavyknocking, your engine needs service.

384

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 385 for additional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operateon fuels that meet California specifications.See the underhood emission control label. If thisfuel is not available in states adopting Californiaemissions standards, your vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 208. If this occurs, return toyour authorized GM dealer for diagnosis.

If it is determined that the condition is causedby the type of fuel used, repairs may not becovered by your warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in theUnited States are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meetU.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valvesclean, or if your vehicle experiences problems dueto dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline thatis advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.Also, your GM dealer has additives that willhelp correct and prevent most deposit-relatedproblems.

385

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must notbe used in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.

General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your authorized GM dealerfor service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel maybe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

386

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks, flames, and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuelpump unattended when refueling yourvehicle. This is against the law in someplaces. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap fromthe hook on the fuel door.

387

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned.Fuel can spray out on you if you openthe fuel cap too quickly. This spray canhappen if your tank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather. Open the fuelcap slowly and wait for any hiss noise tostop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soonas possible. See Washing Your Vehicle onpage 493.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwiseuntil it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 208.

388

There may also be a light that comes on in theinstrument panel to let you know if your gas cap isnot properly installed. See Check Gas CapLight on page 215 for more information.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow offuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get one foryou. If you get the wrong type, it may not fitproperly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damage yourfuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 208.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

389

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood Release1. To open the hood,

first pull the handlewith this symbolon it. It is locatedinside the vehicleunder the instrumentpanel on thedriver’s side.

390

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle andrelease the secondary hood release.

3. Lift the hood, release the prop rod from itsretainer and put the prop rod into the slotin the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the fillercaps are on properly. Then lift the hood torelieve pressure on the prop rod. Remove theprop rod from its slot in the hood and return theprop to its retainer. Lower the hood 6 to 8 inches(15 to 20 cm) above the vehicle and release itto latch fully. Check to make sure the hoodis closed and repeat the process if necessary.

391

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 4.2L L6 engine, here is what you will see:

392

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 406.

B. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See CoolingSystem on page 416.

C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 423.

D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 422.

E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (Out ofView). See “Checking the Fluid Level” underAutomatic Transmission Fluid on page 407.

F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 398.

G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator PressureCap on page 414.

H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 398.

I. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Marked GND).See Jump Starting on page 429.

J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 424.

K. Battery. See Battery on page 428.L. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine

Compartment Fuse Block on page 501.

393

When you open the hood on the 5.3L V8 engine, here is what you will see:

394

A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See CoolingSystem on page 416.

B. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 406.


D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 398.

E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See“Checking the Fluid Level” under AutomaticTransmission Fluid on page 407.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 398.


H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Marked GND).See Jump Starting on page 429.

I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 422.


K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block on page 501.

L. Battery. See Battery on page 428.

395

When you open the hood on the 6.0L V8 TrailBlazer SS engine, here is what you will see:

396

A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See CoolingSystem on page 416.

B. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 406.


D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil onpage 398.

E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See“Checking the Fluid Level” under AutomaticTransmission Fluid on page 407.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Under Engine Cover). See“When to Add Engine Oil” under Engine Oilon page 398.


H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Marked GND).See Jump Starting on page 429.

I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 422.


K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block on page 501.

L. Battery. See Battery on page 428.

397

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 392for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the L mark for the L6 engine orthe cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstickfor the V8 engine, you will need to add at leastone quart/liter of oil. But you must use the right kind.

L6 Engine

V8 Engine

398

This section explains what kind of oil to use. Forengine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 510.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe cross-hatched area (F) that shows theproper operating range for the L6 engineor above the cross-hatched area for theV8 engine, the engine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 392for the location of the engine oil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range. Pushthe dipstick all the way back in when you arethrough.

SS Model OnlyRemove the engine cover for access to the engineoil fill cap as follows:

1. Undo the screw in the middle of the cover.

2. Pop the cover off of the stud on thedriver’s side.

3. Angle the cover up and pull it off of thebracket.

4. Reverse above steps to reinstall the cover.

Except 6.0L V8(VIN Code H) Engine

6.0L V8 (VIN Code H)Engine

399

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseExcept Vehicles with 6.0L V8 (VIN Code H)Engine

Look for two things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meetingGM Standard GM6094M. You shouldlook for and use only an oil that meetsGM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30is best for your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

400

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

You should look for this information on the oilcontainer, and use only those oils that areidentified as meeting GM Standard GM6094Mand have the starburst symbol on the front of theoil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both willprovide easier cold starting and better protectionfor the engine at extremely low temperatures.

401

For 6.0L V8 (VIN Code H) EngineVehicles Only

Look for two things:

• GM4718M

Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oilmeeting GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meetingthis standard may be identified as synthetic.However, not all synthetic oils will meet thisGM standard. You should look for and use onlyan oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.

Notice: If you use oils that do not have theGM4718M Standard designation, you can causeengine damage not covered by your warranty.

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

402

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

You should look for this on the oil container, anduse only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM4718M and have the starburstsymbol on the front of the oil container.

Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with aMobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets all requirementsfor your vehicle.

Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil tomaintain engine oil level, oil meeting GMStandard GM4718M may not be available.You can add substitute oil designatedSAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol atall temperatures. Substitute oil not meetingGM Standard GM4718M should not be usedfor an oil change.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMstandards are all you will need for goodperformance and engine protection.

403

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A change engine oil light willcome on, and, if your vehicle has a DriverInformation Center (DIC), a CHANGE ENGINEOIL message will come. See Change EngineOil Light on page 212 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 220.

Change your oil as soon as possible within thenext 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if youare driving under the best conditions, the oil lifesystem may not indicate that an oil change isnecessary for over a year. However, the engine oiland filter must be changed at least once a yearand at this time the system must be reset.Your dealer has GM-trained people who willperform this work using genuine GM parts andreset the system. It is also important to check theoil regularly and keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since the last oil change. Remember to reset theoil life system whenever the oil is changed.

404

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange your engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime your oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange your oil prior to a change engine oil lightor CHANGE ENGINE OIL message beingturned on, reset the system.

To reset the Engine Oil Life System, do thefollowing:

1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with theengine off.

2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedalslowly three times within five seconds.The change engine oil light will flash while thesystem is resetting.

3. When the light stops flashing, turn the keyto LOCK.

If the light/message comes back on when youstart the vehicle, the engine oil life system has notreset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements thatmay be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. Ifyou change your own oil, be sure to drain all theoil from the filter before disposal. Never disposeof oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodiesof water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to aplace that collects used oil. If you have a problemproperly disposing of your used oil, ask yourdealer, a service station, or a local recyclingcenter for help.

405

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 392 for thelocation of the engineair cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval.See Scheduled Maintenance on page 517 formore information. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engineoil change.

How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,do the following:

1. Remove the screws on the engine aircleaner/filter and lift off the cover.

2. Remove the air cleaner/filter from the housing.Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirtas possible.

3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

4. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.

4.2L L6 Engine shown,5.3L and 6.0L V8Engines similar

406

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not thereand the engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with theair cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt caneasily get into your engine, which will damageit. Always have the air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.

Automatic Transmission FluidWhen to Check and Change AutomaticTransmission FluidA good time to check your automatic transmissionfluid level is when the engine oil is changed.Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 520, andbe sure to use the transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 527.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission FluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at the dealershipservice department.If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damageyour transmission. Too much can mean thatsome of the fluid could come out and fall on hotengine parts or exhaust system parts, starting afire. Too little fluid could cause the transmissionto overheat. Be sure to get an accurate readingif you check your transmission fluid.

407

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransmission fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should beat normal operating temperature, which is180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperaturesare above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than50°F (10°C), drive the vehicle in THIRD (3)until the engine temperature gage moves andthen remains steady for 10 minutes.

A cold fluid check can be made after the vehiclehas been sitting for eight hours or more with theengine off, but this is used only as a reference.

Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outsidetemperatures are 50°F (10°C) or more. If it iscolder than 50°F (10°C), you may have to idlethe engine longer. Should the fluid level be lowduring this cold check, you must check the fluid hotbefore adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot will giveyou a more accurate reading of the fluid level.

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare your vehicle as follows:

1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

2. With the parking brake applied, place the shiftlever in PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear range, pausingfor about three seconds in each range.Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutesor more.

408

Then, without shutting off the engine, followthese steps:

1. Flip the handle up and then remove thedipstick and wipe it with a clean rag orpaper towel.

The automatictransmission dipstickhandle with this symbolon it is located in theengine compartment onthe passenger’s sideof the vehicle.

See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 392 for more information on location.

2. Reinstall it back in all the way, waitthree seconds and then pull it back out again.If the dipstick does not go down the tubeeasily, turn the blade and try again until it isfully inserted in the tube.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and readthe lower level. The fluid level must be inthe COLD area, below the cross-hatchedarea, for a cold check or in the HOT orcross-hatched area for a hot check. Besure to keep the dipstick pointed down toget an accurate reading.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,reinstall the dipstick back in all the way;then flip the handle down to lock the dipstickin place.

409

Consistency of ReadingsAlways check the fluid level at least twice usingthe procedure described previously. Consistency(repeatable readings) is important to maintainingproper fluid level. If inconsistent readingspersist, contact your dealer.

How to Add AutomaticTransmission FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transmission fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 527.

Add fluid only after checking the transmissionfluid while it is hot. A cold check is used only asa reference. If the fluid level is low, add onlyenough of the proper fluid to bring the level up tothe HOT area for a hot check. It does not takemuch fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L).Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damage your vehicle,and the damages may not be coveredby your warranty. Always use the automatictransmission fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 527.

• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid levelas described under “How to CheckAutomatic Transmission Fluid,” earlier inthis section.

• When the correct fluid level is obtained, pushthe dipstick back in all the way; then flipthe handle down to lock the dipstick in place.

410

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occursfirst, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 414.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work asthey should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Alwaysuse DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant inyour vehicle.

411

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant. If you usethis coolant mixture, you do not need to addanything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four timesa year, have your dealer check your coolingsystem.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system,you could damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listedin this manual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 527 for more information.

412

Checking Coolant

The engine coolantrecovery tank is in theengine compartment onthe passenger’s side ofthe vehicle. The cap hasthis symbol on it. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 392for more informationon location.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. Whenyour engine is cold, the coolant level should beat FULL COLD, or a little higher.

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolantrecovery tank.

{CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot canallow steam and scalding liquids toblow out and burn you badly. With thecoolant recovery tank, you will almostnever have to add coolant at the radiator.Never turn the radiator pressurecap — even a little — when the engineand radiator are hot.

413

Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but becareful not to spill it.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Occasionally check the coolant level in theradiator. For information on how to add coolant tothe radiator, see Cooling System on page 416.

Radiator Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 392for information on location.

Engine OverheatingYou will find a coolant temperature gage on yourvehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 207 for moreinformation.

If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center(DIC), the display will show an Engine CoolantHot/Engine Overheated message. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 220 for moreinformation.

414

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Justturn it off and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badly burned.Stop your engine if it overheats, and getout of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty.

If No Steam Is Coming FromYour EngineIf you get an engine overheat warning but seeor hear no steam, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the engine can get alittle too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe todo so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highestfan speed and open the windows asnecessary.

415

If you no longer have the overheat warning,you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does notcome back on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues and you have notstopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam, you can pushdown the accelerator until the engine speedis about twice as fast as normal idle speed forat least three minutes while you are parked.If you still have the warning, turn off the engineand get everyone out of the vehicle until itcools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Coolant Recovery TankB. Radiator Pressure CapC. Engine Fan

4.2L L6 Engine

416

A. Coolant Recovery TankB. Radiator Pressure CapC. Engine Fan

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

The coolant level shouldbe at least up to theFULL COLD mark.If it is not, you may havea leak at the pressurecap or in the radiatorhoses, heater hoses,radiator, water pump,or somewhere elsein the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak.If you run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

5.3L V8 Engine shown, 6.0L V8 Engine similar

417

If there seems to be no leak, start the engineagain. The engine cooling fan speed shouldincrease when idle speed is doubled by pushingthe accelerator pedal down. If it does not,your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery TankIf you have not found a problem yet, but thecoolant level is not at the FULL COLD mark, adda 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® engine coolant at the coolantrecovery tank. See Engine Coolant on page 411for more information.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you would notget the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

418

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolantand the proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank isat the FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.

If the overheat warning continues, there is onemore thing you can try. You can add the propercoolant mixture directly to the radiator, but be surethe cooling system is cool before you do it.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure,and if you turn the radiator pressurecap — even a little — they can come outat high speed. Never turn the cap whenthe cooling system, including the radiatorpressure cap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and radiator pressure cap to coolif you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

419

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

1. You can remove the radiator pressure capwhen the cooling system, including theradiator pressure cap and upper radiatorhose, is no longer hot.Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseabout one full turn. If you hear a hiss, waitfor that to stop. A hiss means there isstill some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap.Remove the pressure cap.

3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture, up to the base of the fillerneck. See Engine Coolant on page 411for more information about the propercoolant mixture.

420

4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to theFULL COLD mark.

5. Put the cap back on the coolant recoverytank, but leave the radiator pressurecap off.

6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feelthe upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch outfor the engine cooling fan.

7. By this time, the coolant level inside theradiator filler neck may be lower. If the level islower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture through the filler neck until thelevel reaches the base of the filler neck.

8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any timeduring this procedure if coolant begins to flowout of the filler neck, reinstall the pressurecap. Be sure the pressure cap is hand-tightand fully seated.

421

Engine Fan NoiseYour vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan.When the clutch is engaged, the fan spins fasterto provide more air to cool the engine. In mosteveryday driving conditions the clutch is notengaged. This improves fuel economy and reducesfan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailertowing, and/or high outside temperatures, the fanspeed increases when the clutch engages soyou may hear an increase in fan noise. This isnormal and should not be mistaken as thetransmission slipping or making extra shifts. It ismerely the cooling system functioning properly.The fan will slow down when additional cooling isnot required and the clutch disengages.

You may also hear this fan noise when you startthe engine. It will go away as the fan clutchdisengages.

Power Steering Fluid

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 392 forreservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leakin the system or you hear an unusual noise.A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

422

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoirclean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick witha clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick.

For vehicles with the 4.2L L6 engine, the levelshould be at the C (Cold) mark. For vehicles withthe 5.3L or 6.0L V8 engines, the level shouldbe at the FULL mark. If necessary, add onlyenough fluid to bring the level up to the mark.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 527.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

423

Adding Washer FluidOpen the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 392for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructions foradding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution to freezeand damage your washer fluid tank andother parts of the washer system. Also,water does not clean as well as washerfluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold. Thisallows for expansion if freezing occurs,which could damage the tank if it iscompletely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damage yourwasher system and paint.

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 392 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have yourbrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later your brakes will not work well, orwill not work at all.

424

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your linings are worn, then you willhave too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid, asnecessary, only when work is done on thebrake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it canspill on the engine. The fluid will burn ifthe engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulicsystem. See “Checking Brake Fluid” inthis section.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhen to check your brake fluid. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 517.

Checking Brake FluidYou can check the brake fluid without taking offthe cap.

Look at the brake fluidreservoir. The fluid levelshould be aboveMIN. If it is not, haveyour brake systemchecked to see if thereis a leak.

After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,make sure the level is above the MIN, but notover the MAX mark.

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 527.

425

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. This willhelp keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just a fewdrops of mineral-based oil, such as engineoil, in the brake system can damage brakesystem parts so badly that they will have tobe replaced. Do not let someone put in thewrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluidon your vehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 493.

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may causea brake squeal when the brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not mean something iswrong with your brakes.

426

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torquespecifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does notreturn to normal height, or if there is a rapidincrease in pedal travel. This could be a signof brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you make a brake stop, your discbrakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and testedwith top-quality GM brake parts. When you replaceparts of your braking system — for example,when your brake linings wear down and you neednew ones put in — be sure you get newapproved GM replacement parts. If you do not,your brakes may no longer work properly.For example, if someone puts in brake linings thatare wrong for your vehicle, the balance betweenyour front and rear brakes can change — forthe worse. The braking performance you havecome to expect can change in many other waysif someone puts in the wrong replacementbrake parts.

427

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 392 for battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keepyour battery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 429 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

428

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transmission in PARK (P) or amanual transmission in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake. If you have afour-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfercase is not in NEUTRAL.

429

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlets, if equipped. Turn off the radio and alllamps that are not needed. This will avoidsparks and help to save both batteries. And itcould save the radio!

4. Open both hoods and locate the batteries.Find the positive (+) and negative (−)terminals on each battery. Your vehicle has aremote negative (−) jump starting terminal.You should always use this remote terminalinstead of the terminal on the battery.The remote negative (−) terminal is located onthe front engine lift bracket on vehicles withthe 4.2L L6 engine or the engine accessorydrive bracket for vehicles with the 5.3Lor 6.0L V8 engines, and is marked GND(Ground). See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 392 for more information on location.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People havebeen hurt doing this, and some havebeen blinded. Use a flashlight if youneed more light.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle. Butif a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdo not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burnyou. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

430

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one. Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get a short thatwould damage the battery and maybe otherparts too. And do not connect the negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminal on thedead battery because this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the redpositive (+) cable tothe positive (+)terminal of the deadbattery. Use aremote positive (+)terminal if thevehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

431

Do not let the other end touch anything untilthe next step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. Itgoes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to the remote negative (−) terminal onthe vehicle with the dead battery. Your vehiclehas a remote negative (−) terminal, markedGND, for this purpose.

The remote negative (−) terminal is located onthe front engine lift bracket for the 4.2L L6engine, and on the accessory drive bracket forthe 5.3L or 6.0L V8 engines.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)cable to the remote negative (−) terminalon the vehicle with the dead battery.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electricalshorting may occur and damage the vehicle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always connect and removethe jumper cables in the correct order, makingsure that the cables do not touch each otheror other metal.4.2L L6 Engine 5.3L V8 Engine shown,

6.0L V8 Enginesimilar

432

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

Jumper Cable Removal

433

All-Wheel DriveWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check fluid unlessyou suspect there is a leak or you hear anunusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accuratereading, the vehicleshould be on alevel surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, located on the transfer case, you’ll need toadd some lubricant. Add enough lubricant toraise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.Use care not to overtighten the plug.

What to UseTo determine what kind of lubricant to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 527.

Rear AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check rear axlefluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hearan unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected and repaired.

434


To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

The proper level is from 0 to 3/8 inch (0 to 10 mm)below the bottom of the filler plug hole, locatedon the rear axle.

For vehicles equipped with the SS package,the proper level is from 0.6 inch to 1.6 inches(15 mm to 40 mm) below the bottom of thefiller plug hole, located on the rear axle. Addonly enough fluid to reach the proper level.


For vehicles equipped with the SS package,to add lubricant when the level is low, useSAE 75W–90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GMPart No. U.S. 12378261, in Canada 10953455)meeting GM Specification 9986115. To completelyrefill after draining, add 4 ounces (118 ml)of Limited-Slip Axle Lubricant Additive (GMPart No. U.S. 1052358, in Canada 992694).Then fill to the bottom of the filler plug hole withthe Synthetic Gear Lubricant.

Four-Wheel DriveTransfer CaseWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check fluid unlessyou suspect there is a leak or you hear anunusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected and repaired.

435


To get an accuratereading, the vehicleshould be on alevel surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Addenough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom ofthe filler plug hole. Use care not to overtightenthe plug.


Front AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check front axlefluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hearan unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected and repaired.


To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

436

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, located on the front axle, you may needto add some lubricant.

When the differential is cold, add enough lubricantto raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below thefiller plug hole.

When the differential is at operating temperature(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the levelto the bottom of the filler plug hole.


Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 439.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

437

Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate/Liftglass

on page 106 for more information.

2. Remove thetwo screwsfrom the taillampassembly.

3. Pull the taillamp assembly away fromthe vehicle.

4. Unclip the wiring harness (A) and remove thethree retaining screws (B) from the socket plate.

5. Remove the socket plate.6. Holding the socket, pull the bulb to release

it from the socket.7. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.8. Reinstall the socket and tighten the

three screws.9. Reconnect the wiring harness.

10. Reinstall the taillamp assembly by lining upthe locator pins with the retainers in thevehicle’s body.

438

11. Reinstall the two screws and tighten.12. Close the liftgate.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:1. Remove the two screws holding the

license plate lamp lens.

2. Pull the lens away from the lamp assembly.

3. Pull the old bulb straight out from thebulb socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Replace the lamp assembly lens and tightenthe screws.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb Number

License Plate Lamp W5W

Taillamps 3157

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.

439

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 517.

Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch thewindshield when no wiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Any damage thatoccurs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touchthe windshield.

1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiperarm until it locks into a vertical position.

A. Blade AssemblyB. Arm AssemblyC. Locking Tab

D. Blade PivotE. Hook SlotF. Arm Hook

2. Press down on the blade assembly pivotlocking tab. Pull down on the blade assemblyto release it from the wiper arm hook.

440

3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly.The insert has two notches at one end that arelocked by the bottom claws of the bladeassembly. At the notched end, pull the insertfrom the blade assembly.

4. To install the new wiper insert, slide theinsert (D), notched end last, into the endwith two blade claws (A). Slide the insert allthe way through the blade claws at theopposite end (B). The plastic caps (C) will beforced off as the insert is fully inserted.

5. Be sure that the notches are locked by thebottom claws. Make sure that all other claws areproperly locked on both sides of the insert slots.

A. Claw in NotchB. Correct InstallationC. Incorrect Installation

6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper armhook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locksin the hook slot.

7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and bladeassembly onto the windshield.

441

Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement

1. Lift the wiper blade assembly up and out ofthe park rest position.

2. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from thebackglass. The backglass wiper blade will notlock in a vertical position, so care shouldbe used when pulling it away from the vehicle.

3. Rotate the wiper blade assembly, and pull itoff of the wiper arm. Hold the wiper arm inposition and push the blade away fromthe wiper arm.

4. Replace the wiper blade.

5. Return the wiper blade assembly to the parkrest position.

442

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty bookletfor details. For additional information refer tothe tire manufacturer’s booklet included withyour vehicle.

{CAUTION:

• Poorly maintained and improperlyused tires are dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out anda serious accident. See Loading YourVehicle on page 350.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour tires are cold. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 452.

• Over inflated tires are more likely tobe cut, punctured, or broken by asudden impact — such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If your tread is badly worn, or ifyour tires have been damaged,replace them.

See High-Speed Operation on page 454for inflation pressure adjustment for highspeed driving.

443

Low-Profile Performance Tire(Trailblazer SS)If your vehicle has P255/50R20 size tires, theyare classified as low-profile performance tires.These tires are designed for very responsivedriving on wet or dry pavement. You mayalso notice more road noise with low-profileperformance tires and that they tend towear faster.

Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires,they are more susceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact than standard profiletires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damagecan occur when coming into contact withroad hazards like, potholes, or sharp edgedobjects, or when sliding into a curb. Your GMwarranty does not cover this type of damage.Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressureand, when possible avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and other road hazards.

Winter TiresFor cold weather driving conditions you may preferto get tires designed for snow or ice, if yourvehicle has P255/50R20 size tires. See yourdealer for details regarding winter tire availabilityand proper tire selection. Also, see BuyingNew Tires on page 462.

If you choose to use winter tires:

• Use tires of the same brand and tread type onall four wheel positions.

• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, loadrange, and speed rating as your originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speed rating as youroriginal equipment tires may not be available forH, V, W, Y and ZR speed rated tires. If you choosewinter tires with a lower speed rating, neverexceed the tire’s maximum speed capability.

444

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into thesidewall. The following illustrations are examplesof a typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combinationof letters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, constructiontype, and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only oneside may have the date of manufacture.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

445

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required to gradetires based on three performance factors:treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.For more information, see Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 465.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.For information on recommended tire pressuresee Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 452and Loading Your Vehicle on page 350.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combinationof letters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, constructiontype, and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

446

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum loadthat can be carried and the maximum pressureneeded to support that load when used in a dualconfiguration. For information on recommendedtire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 452 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 350.

(D) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only oneside may have the date of manufacture.

(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum loadthat can be carried and the maximum pressureneeded to support that load when used as asingle. For information on recommendedtire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 452 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 350.

447

Tire SizeThe following examples show the different parts ofa tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter Pas the first character in the tire size means apassenger vehicle tire engineered to standards setby the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.

(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The UnitedStates version of a metric tire sizing system. Theletters LT as the first two characters in the tire sizemeans a light truck tire engineered to standards setby the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewall tosidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, asshown in item C of the light truck (LT-Metric) tireillustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is75 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire. Theletter R means radial ply construction; the letter Dmeans diagonal or bias ply construction; and theletter B means belted-bias ply construction.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

448

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: The service descriptionindicates the load range and speed rating of a tire.The load index can range from 1 to 279. Speedratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examplesof optional accessories are, automatictransmission/transaxle, power steering, powerbrakes, power windows, power seats, andair conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theplies are laid at alternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 452.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

449

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 350.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating forthe front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 350.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating forthe rear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 350.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on lightduty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximumair pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 350.

450

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 452 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 350.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tireson page 462.

451

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratingsare determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 465.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 350.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load onan individual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attachedto a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacityweight and the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tireand Loading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 350.

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right.It is not. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

452

A Tire and Loading Information label isattached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar),below the driver’s door latch. This labelshows your vehicle’s original equipment tiresand the correct inflation pressures for your tireswhen they are cold. The recommendedcold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label,is the minimum amount of air pressureneeded to support your vehicle’s maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding howmuch weight your vehicle can carry, and anexample of the tire and loading informationlabel, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 350.How you load your vehicle affects vehiclehandling and ride comfort, never load yourvehicle with more weight than it was designedto carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.

Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to checktire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them.Radial tires may look properly inflated even whenthey’re underinflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the tire and loading information label,no further adjustment is necessary. If thepressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.

453

High-Speed Operation

{CAUTION:

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h)or higher, puts an additional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed driving causesexcessive heat build up and can causesudden tire failure. You could have acrash and you or others could be killed.Some high-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment for highspeed operation. When speed limits androad conditions are such that a vehicle canbe driven at high speeds, make sure thetires are rated for high speed operation,in excellent condition, and set to thecorrect cold tire inflation pressure for thevehicle load.

If your vehicle has P255/50R20 104V size tiresinstalled on the rear axle, they will require inflationpressure adjustment when driving your vehicleat speeds above 99 mph (160 km/h). Set the coldinflation pressure, for the rear tires only, to themaximum inflation pressure shown on thetire sidewall, or 38 psi (262 kPa), whichever islower. See the example following. When you endthis high-speed driving, return the tires to thecold tire inflation pressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Loading YourVehicle on page 350.

Example:

You will find the maximum load and inflationpressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in smallletters, near the rim flange. It will read somethinglike this: Maximum load 690 kg (1521 lbs)300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.

454

For this example, you would set the inflationpressure for high-speed driving at 38 psi (262 kPa).

The inflation pressure for the front tires should beset to the cold tire inflation pressure shown onthe Tire and Loading Information label.

Racing or other competitive driving may affect thewarranty coverage of your vehicle. See yourwarranty booklet for more information.

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) usesradio and sensor technology to check tire pressurelevels. TPMS sensors are mounted on each tireand wheel assembly, except the spare tire.The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure inyour vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressurereadings to a receiver located in the vehicle.

The TPMS is designed to alert the driver if a lowtire pressure condition exists. If your vehiclehas the Driver Information Center (DIC) steeringwheel control buttons, tire pressure levelsmay also be checked through the DIC. See “TirePressures” under DIC Operation and Displayson page 217.

When a low tire pressure condition is detected,the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressurewarning symbol located on the instrument panelcluster, and at the same time a message will alsoappear on the DIC display. The low tire pressurewarning symbol on the instrument panel clusterand the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warningmessage on the DIC will appear at each ignitioncycle until the tires are inflated to the correctinflation pressure.

455

For additional information and details aboutthe DIC operation and displays see DIC Operationand Displays on page 217 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 220.

You may notice, during cooler weather conditions,that the tire pressure monitor light, located onthe instrument panel cluster, and the CHECK TIREPRESSURE message will appear when thevehicle is first started, and then turn off as youstart to drive the vehicle. This could be anearly indicator that the tire pressures are gettinglow and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold and inflatedto the inflation pressure recommended by thevehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tiresof a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safetyfeature, your vehiclehas been equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoring system(TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressuretelltale when oneor more of your tiresis significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, evenif under-inflation has not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

456

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approximatelyone minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as themalfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

The Tire and Loading Information label (tireinformation placard) shows the size of yourvehicle’s original tires and the correct inflationpressure for your vehicle’s tires when they are cold.See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 452. For thelocation of the tire and loading information label,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 350.

Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a lowtire pressure condition but it does not replacenormal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 460 and Tires on page 443.

Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if yourvehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquidsealant can damage the tire pressure monitorsensors.

457

TPMS Sensor Identification CodesEach TPMS sensor has a unique identificationcode. Any time you replace one or more ofthe TPMS sensors or rotate the vehicle’s tires, theidentification codes will need to be matched tothe new tire/wheel position. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions in the followingorder: driver’s side front tire, passenger’s sidefront tire, passenger’s side rear tire, and driver’sside rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.See your dealer for service.

The TPMS sensors may also be matched to eachtire/wheel position by increasing or decreasingthe tire’s air pressure. When increasing the tire’spressure, do not exceed the maximum inflationpressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.

You will have two minutes to match the firsttire/wheel position, and five minutes overall tomatch all four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longerthan two minutes, to match the first tire andwheel, or more than five minutes to match all fourtire and wheel positions the matching processstops and you will need to start over.

The TPMS sensor matching process isoutlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with theengine off.

3. Turn the headlamp control from off to parkinglamps four times within three seconds. Adouble horn chirp will sound and the TPMSlow tire warning light will begin to flash.The double horn chirp and flashing TPMSwarning light indicate that the TPMS matchingprocess has started. The TPMS warninglight should continue flashing throughout thematching procedure.

4. Start with the driver’s side front tire.

458

5. Remove the valve cap from the valve capstem. Activate the TPMS sensor byincreasing or decreasing the tire’s air pressurefor 10 seconds, then stop and listen for asingle horn chirp. The single horn chirp shouldsound within 15 seconds, confirming thatthe sensor identification code has beenmatched to this tire and wheel position. If youdo not hear the confirming single hornchirp, you will need to start over with stepnumber one. To let air-pressure out of a tireyou can use the pointed end of the valve cap,a pencil-style air pressure gage, or a key.

6. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire,and repeat the procedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire,and repeat the procedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 5.

9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for thedriver’s side rear tire, check to see if the TPMSwarning light is still flashing. If yes, turn theignition switch to LOCK to exit the sensormatching process. If the TPMS warning lightis not flashing, the five minute time limit haspassed and you will need to start the processover beginning with Step 1.

10. Set all four tires to the recommended airpressure level as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems

The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.If you replace one of the road tires with the spare,the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message will bedisplayed on the DIC screen. This message shouldgo off once you re-install the road tire containingthe TPMS sensor.

459

Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and Science CanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions:



The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withRSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:




Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 462and Wheel Replacement on page 467 formore information.

Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push,pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If itmoves, use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.For information on storing or removing thespare tire, see Changing a Flat Tire on page 472.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achievemore uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 517.

460

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 350, for an example ofthe label and its location on your vehicle.

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)sensors will need to be reset after a tire rotation.See “TPMS Sensor Identification Codes” underTire Pressure Monitor System on page 455.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 510.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 472.

461

When It Is Time for New TiresOne way to tell when it istime for new tires is tocheck the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining. Somecommercial truck tiresmay not have treadwearindicators.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:• You can see the indicators at three or more

places around the tire.• You can see cord or fabric showing through

the tire’s rubber.• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or

snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage

that cannot be repaired well because of the sizeor location of the damage.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tiresfor your vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires,GM strongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will be followed by a MS,for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 445 for additional information.

462

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires) the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on yourvehicle’s wheels.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem may give an inaccurate low-pressurewarning if non-TPC spec rated tires are installedon your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tiresmay give a low-pressure warning that is higher orlower than the proper warning level you wouldget with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 455.

463

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information Label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 350,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation Label.

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires, thismay affect the way your vehicle performs, includingits braking, ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover. Additionally,if your vehicle has electronic systems such as,anti-lock brakes, traction control, and electronicstability control, the performance of these systemscan be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tiresnot recommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel and tiresystems developed for your vehicle, andhave them properly installed by a GMcertified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 462 andAccessories and Modifications on page 382 foradditional information.

464

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicableon the tire sidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may havepoor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

465

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

466

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offsetand be mounted the same way as the oneit replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them onlywith new GM original equipment parts. Thisway, you will be sure to have the right wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collisionin which you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 472 for moreinformation.

467

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

Do not use tire chains. There is notenough clearance. Tire chains used ona vehicle without the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage to thebrakes, suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to lose control ofyour vehicle and you or others may beinjured in a crash. Use another type oftraction device only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on your vehicleand tire size combination and roadconditions. Follow that manufacturer’sinstructions. To help avoid damage toyour vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust orremove the device if it is contacting yourvehicle, and do not spin your wheels.If you do find traction devices that will fit,install them on the rear tires.

468

Accessory InflatorYour vehicle may have an accessory inflatorsystem. You can inflate things like basketballs andbicycle tires. You can also use it to bring yourtire pressure up to the proper pressure. It is notdesigned to inflate large objects which will requiremore than five minutes to inflate, such as anair mattress.

The accessory inflatoris located in the rearcompartment onthe driver’s side ofthe vehicle behind anaccess cover, nearthe liftgate opening.

To remove the cover, push in on the tab to accessthe inflator.

You may have an air inflator kit that islocated in the glove compartment. It includesa 22 ft (6.7 m) hose with three nozzle adapters.

To use the accessory inflator, do the following:

1. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapterto the end of the hose, if required.

{CAUTION:

Inflating something too much can makeit explode, and you or others could beinjured. Be sure to read the inflatorinstructions, and inflate any object onlyto its recommended pressure.

2. Attach that end of the hose to the object youwish to inflate.

3. Attach the other end of the hose to the outlet.

469

4. Press and release the switch to turn the airinflator on. The indicator light will remain onwhen the inflator is running.The system has an internal clock to preventthe system from overheating. The systemwill allow about five minutes of running time,then the compressor will stop. The indicatorlight will then begin to flash. When the indicatoris off, the inflator can be started again bypressing the switch. If the compressor is stillhot, it may only run for a short time beforeshutting off again.

5. Press and release the switch to turn theinflator off.

Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch and storeit in its proper location. Remove the inflatorhose from the outlet during loading and unloading.Load leveling will not function with the inflatorhose attached to the inflator outlet. SeeElectronically Controlled Air Suspension Systemon page 361 for more information.

To reinstall the cover, line up the tabs at theback of the cover, put it in place and latchthe tabs.

A continuous flashing indicator light may alsoindicate a malfunction in the air suspensionsystem. See Electronically Controlled AirSuspension System on page 361 for moreinformation.

470

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Takeyour foot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop wellout of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Get the vehicle under control by steering theway you want the vehicle to go. It may be verybumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing a flattire. If it is used for anything else, you orothers could be badly injured or killed ifthe vehicle slips off the jack. Use the jackprovided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how touse the jacking equipment to change a flattire safely.

471

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place.Turn on your hazard warning flashers. SeeHazard Warning Flashers on page 170 formore information.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll over orfall on you or other people. You and theycould be badly injured or even killed. Finda level place to change your tire. To helpprevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).



3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,be sure the transfer case is in a drivegear — not in NEUTRAL.

4. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

5. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

6. Put the wheel blocks at the front andrear of the tire farthest away from theone being changed. That would be thetire on the other side, at the oppositeend of the vehicle.

472

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you how to usethe jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

The jacking equipment needed to remove thespare tire is stored under the rear seat. To releasethe jack from its holder, turn the knob on thejack counterclockwise to lower the jack head.See Rear Seat Operation on page 18 for moreinformation.

473

The tools you will be using include the wheelwrench (A), wheel blocks (B), extension(s) (socketend) (C), handle (jack end) (D), and jack (E).

The following instructions explain how to removethe underbody-mounted spare underneathyour vehicle.

Notice: If you remove or restow a tire from/tothe storage position under the vehicle whenit is supported by a jack, you could damage thetire and/or your vehicle. Always remove orrestow a tire when the vehicle is on the ground.

A. Wheel WrenchB. Hoist ShaftC. ExtensionD. RetainerE. Spare or Flat Tire

(Valve StemPointed Up)

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate/Liftglass onpage 106 for more information.

2. Attach the wheel wrench (A) to theextension (C).

474

3. Insert the socketend of theextension (C) ona 45 degreeangle downwardinto the hoist driveshaft hole.

It is exposed when the rear gate is open andis just above the rear bumper. Be sure thesocket end of the extension (C) connectsto the hoist shaft. 4. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to

lower the spare tire. Keep turning the wheelwrench until the spare tire can be pulledout from under the vehicle.If the spare tire does not lower to the ground,the secondary latch is engaged causingthe tire not to lower. See Secondary LatchSystem on page 482 for more information.

475

5. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable whenthe tire has been completely lowered, and pullit through the wheel opening.

6. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.

Notice: If you drive away before the spare tireor secondary latch system cable has beenreinstalled, you could damage your vehicle.Always reinstall this cable before drivingyour vehicle.

7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.

476

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Using the wheelwrench, loosenall the wheel nuts.Do not removethem yet.

2. Turn the jack adjusting knob clockwise byhand to raise the jack lift head.

3. Place the handle, extension and wheelwrench onto the jack.

A. Front Frame/Rear AxleB. HandleC. ExtensionD. ExtensionE. Wheel Wrench

4. Place the jack in the appropriate positionnearest the flat tire.

Front Position Rear Position

477

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle whenit is supported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raisingthe vehicle.

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handleclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enough room forthe spare tire to fit.

478

6. Remove all thewheel nuts and takeoff the flat tire.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time.The wheel could come off and cause anaccident. When you change a wheel,remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle.



In an emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if needed,to get all the rust or dirt off.

7. Remove any rustor dirt from thewheel bolts,mounting surfacesand spare wheel.

8. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mountingsurface.

479

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

9. Put the nuts on by hand. Make sure therounded end is toward the wheel.

10. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel isheld against the hub. If a nut cannot beturned by hand, use the wheel wrench andsee your dealer as soon as possible.

11. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

480

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new originalequipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhereas soon as you can and have the nutstightened with a torque wrench to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 510for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 510 forthe wheel nut torque specification.

12. Use the wrench totighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequenceas shown.

481

Secondary Latch SystemYour vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoistassembly equipped with a secondary latchsystem. It is designed to stop the spare tire fromsuddenly falling off your vehicle if the cable holdingthe spare tire is damaged. For the secondarylatch to work, the tire must be stored with the valvestem pointing up. See Storing a Flat or SpareTire and Tools on page 486 for instructionson storing the spare or flat tire correctly.

{CAUTION:

Before beginning this procedure read allthe instructions. Failure to read and followthe instructions could damage the hoistassembly and you and others could gethurt. Read and follow the instructionslisted next.

{CAUTION:

Someone standing too close during theprocedure could be injured by the jack.If the spare tire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one is behindyou or on either side of you as you pullthe jack out from the spare.

To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,do the following:

1. Check under thevehicle to see ifthe cable is visible.If it is not visible,proceed to Step 6.

482

2. If visible, first try to tighten the cable byturning the wheel wrench clockwise untilyou hear two clicks or feel it skip twice.You cannot overtighten the cable.

3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise three or four turns.

4. Repeat this procedure at least two times.If the spare tire lowers to the ground,continue with Step 2 of Removing the SpareTire and Tools on page 473.

5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise untilapproximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cableis exposed.

6. Attach the jack handle, extension(s) and thewheel wrench to the jack and place it underthe vehicle towards the front of the rearbumper. Position the center lift point of thejack under the center of the spare tire.

7. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jackuntil it lifts the end fitting.

483

8. Continue raising the jack until the spare tirestops moving upward and is held firmly inplace. The secondary latch has released andthe spare tire is balancing on the jack.

9. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Keep lowering the jackuntil the spare tire slides off the jack oris hanging by the cable.

10. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack andcarefully remove the jack. Use one hand topush against the spare while firmly pulling thejack out from under the spare tire with theother hand.

11. If the spare tire ishanging from thecable, insertthe socket end ofthe extensioninto the hoist shafthole on a 45 degreeangle downward.

12. Be sure that the socket end of the extensionconnects to the hoist shaft.

484

Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise tolower the spare the rest of the way.

13. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable andpull it through the wheel opening. Pull thetire out from under the vehicle.

Notice: If you drive away before the spare tireor secondary latch system cable has beenreinstalled, you could damage your vehicle.Always reinstall this cable before driving yourvehicle.

14. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise thecable back up if the cable is hanging underthe vehicle.

Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon asyou can. You will not be able to store a spare tireusing the hoist assembly until it has beenrepaired or replaced.

485

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

{CAUTION:

The underbody-mounted spare tire needsto be stored with the valve stem pointingup. If the spare tire is stored with thevalve stem pointing downward, itssecondary latch will not work properlyand the spare tire could loosen andsuddenly fall from your vehicle. If thishappened when your vehicle was beingdriven, the tire might contact a person oranother vehicle, causing injury and, ofcourse, damage to itself as well. Be surethe underbody-mounted spare tire isstored with its valve stem pointing up.

Notice: An aluminum wheel with a flat tireshould always be stored under the vehicle withthe hoist. However, storing it that way for anextended period could damage the wheel.To avoid this, always stow the wheel properlywith the valve stem pointing up and havethe wheel repaired as soon as possible.

486

Follow this diagram to store theunderbody-mounted flat or spare tire.

A. Wheel WrenchB. Hoist ShaftC. ExtensionD. RetainerE. Spare or Flat Tire

(Valve StemPointed Up)

1. Put the tire (E) on the ground at the rear ofthe vehicle.

2. Remove the hubcap, if the vehicle has one,from the flat tire by tapping the backside ofthe hubcap with the wheel wrench (A). Store ina safe location until the flat tire is repaired.Once the tire is repaired, replace the hubcap.

3. Make sure the valve stem is pointed up andto the rear.

4. Pull the retainer (D) through the wheel.

5. Put the socket end of the extension (C)through the hole just above the rear bumper ata 45 degree angle downward. Connect thesocket end of the extension to the hoistshaft (B).

6. Raise the tire fully against the underside ofthe vehicle. Continue turning the wheelwrench (A) clockwise until you hear two clicksor feel it skip twice. This indicates that thetire is secure and the cable is tight. The sparetire hoist cannot be overtightened.

487

7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push,pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire.If the tire moves, use the wheel wrench andsocket end of the extension to tighten thecable.

8. Return the equipment to the proper locationin the vehicle as shown next.

A. HandleB. Wheel WrenchC. Instruction Label

D. Extension(s)E. KnobF. Wheel Blocks and Jack

1. Attach the handle (A), wheel wrench (B), andextension (D) in the slots provided.

2. Roll up the instruction label (C) and return tothe slot in the tool kit.

3. Assemble the wheel blocks (F) to the jack.4. Turn the knob (E) on the jack clockwise

to raise the jack head.5. Return the rear seat to its proper position.

488

Spare TireYour vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated sparetire. A spare tire may lose air over time, so check itsinflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 452 and Loading Your Vehicleon page 350 for information regarding proper tireinflation and loading your vehicle. For instruction onhow to remove, install or store a spare tire, seeRemoving the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tireon page 477 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools on page 486.

After installing the spare tire on your vehicle,you should stop as soon as possible and makesure the spare is correctly inflated. Have thedamaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced assoon as you can and installed back onto yourvehicle. This way, a spare tire will be availablein case you need it again.

Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes,because they will not fit. Keep your spare tireand its wheel together.

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may result fromusing cleaners on surfaces for which they were notintended. Use glass cleaner only on glass.

489

Remove any accidental over-spray from othersurfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, applycleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the rear window defogger. When cleaningthe glass on your vehicle, use only a soft clothand glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere toall safety instructions on the label. While cleaningyour vehicle’s interior, maintain adequateventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors andwindows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary,you can also obtain a product from your GM dealerto remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

490

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soilwith a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until no more canbe removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much aspossible and then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil andgently rub toward the center. Continuecleaning, using a clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

491

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your interior andare not recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

492

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 527.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not usestrong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sureto rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residuecompletely. Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 498. Do notuse cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaningagents should be flushed promptly and notallowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain.Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or anall-cotton towel to avoid surface scratchesand water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

493

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 493.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of yourvehicle by hand may be necessary to removeresidue from the paint finish. You can getGM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials onpage 498.

If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paintfinish, the clearcoat gives more depth and glossto the colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and made fora basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar,tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrialchimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish ifthey remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicleas soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe for painted surfacesto remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather and chemical fallout that can take their tollover a period of years. You can help to keepthe paint finish looking new by keeping yourvehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal PartsBright metal parts should be cleaned regularlyto keep their luster. Washing with water is all thatis usually needed. However, you may usechrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoiddamaging protective trim, never use auto orchrome polish, steam or caustic soap to cleanaluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish,is recommended for all bright metal parts.

494

Windshield, Backglass, andWiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with afull-strength glass cleaning liquid. The windshieldis clean if beads do not form when you rinse itwith water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

Aluminum Wheels

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damagethe surface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Use onlyGM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

495

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminumor chrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

Do not take the vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage thesurface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheetmetal repair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material toparts repaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected inyour dealer’s body and paint shop.

496

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody.If these are not removed, corrosion and rustcan develop on the underbody parts such asfuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust systemeven though they have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materialsfrom the underbody with plain water. Clean anyareas where mud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frame shouldbe loosened before being flushed. Your dealeror an underbody car washing system can dothis for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causesthis, GM will repair, at no charge to the owner,the surfaces of new vehicles damaged bythis fallout condition within 12 months or12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

497

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and RoadOil Remover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step.No wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleansand lightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and clothupholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

498

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on theCertification/Tire and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label on the inside of the glovebox. It is very helpful if you ever need to orderparts. On this label, you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

499

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 88.

HeadlampsThe headlamp wiring is protected by four fuses.An electrical overload will cause a lamp to goon and off. If this happens, have your headlampwiring checked right away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by acircuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheatsdue to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stopuntil the motor cools. If the overload is caused bysome electrical problem, be sure to get it fixed.

Power Windows and OtherPower OptionsCircuit breakers protect the power windows andother power accessories. When the current load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,protecting the circuit until the problem is fixedor goes away.

500

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fusesand circuit breakers. This greatly reducesthe chance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road anddon’t have a spare fuse, you can borrow onethat has the same amperage. Just pick somefeature of your vehicle that you can getalong without — like the radio or cigarettelighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correctamperage. Replace it as soon as you can.

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

The fuse block is located under the hood in theengine compartment on the driver’s side ofthe vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 392 for more information on location.

Remove the primary cover by pressing thetwo locking tabs. Remove the secondary cover bysnapping off while lifting. To reinstall the fusepanel cover, reverse the sequence.

501

Fuses Usage

1 Electrically-Controlled AirSuspension

2 Passenger’s Side High-BeamHeadlamp

Fuses Usage

3 Passenger’s Side Low-BeamHeadlamp

4 Back-Up Trailer Lamps

L6 Engine

502

Fuses Usage

5 Driver’s Side High-BeamHeadlamp

6 Driver’s Side Low-BeamHeadlamp

7 Windshield Wiper8 Automatic Transfer Case9 Windshield Washer

10 Powertrain Control Module B11 Fog Lamps12 Stoplamp13 Cigarette Lighter14 Not Used15 Electric Adjustable Pedal16 Truck Body Controller, Ignition 117 Crank18 Airbag19 Trailer Electric Brake20 Cooling Fan21 Horn22 Ignition E23 Electronic Throttle Control

24 Instrument Panel Cluster,Driver Information Center

Fuses Usage

25 Automatic Shift Lock ControlSystem

26 Transmission Control Module(TCM) Canister

27 Backup28 Powertrain Control Module 129 Oxygen Sensor30 Air Conditioning31 Truck Body Controller 132 Trailer33 Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)34 Ignition A35 Blower Motor36 Ignition B50 Passenger’s Side Trailer Turn51 Driver’s Side Trailer Turn52 Hazard Flashers53 Headlamp Driver Module

54 Air Injection Reactor (AIR)Solenoid

56 Air Injection Reactor (AIR) Pump

58 Vehicle Stability EnhancementSystem (StabiliTrak®)

59 Regulated Voltage Control

503

Relays Usage37 Headlamp Washer38 Rear Window Wiper/Washer39 Fog Lamps40 Horn41 Fuel Pump42 Windshield Washer43 High-Beam Headlamp44 Air Conditioning45 Cooling Fan

Relays Usage46 Headlamp Driver Module47 Starter49 Electric Adjustable Pedal55 Air Injection Reactor (AIR) Solenoid57 Powertrain

Miscellaneous Usage48 Instrument Panel Battery

504

Fuses Usage

1 Electrically-Controlled AirSuspension

2 Passenger’s Side High-BeamHeadlamp

Fuses Usage

3 Passenger’s Side Low-BeamHeadlamp

4 Back-Up-Trailer Lamps

V8 Engine

505

Fuses Usage

5 Driver’s Side High-BeamHeadlamp

6 Driver’s Side Low-BeamHeadlamp

7 Windshield Wiper8 Automatic Transfer Case9 Windshield Washer

10 Powertrain Control Module B11 Fog Lamps12 Stoplamp13 Cigarette Lighter14 Ignition Coils

15 Transmission Control ModuleCanister Vent

16 Truck Body Controller, Ignition 117 Crank18 Airbag19 Trailer Electric Brake20 Cooling Fan21 Horn22 Ignition E23 Electronic Throttle Control

24 Instrument Panel Cluster, DriverInformation Center

Fuses Usage

25 Automatic Shift Lock ControlSystem

26 Engine 127 Backup28 Powertrain Control Module 129 Powertrain Control Module30 Air Conditioning31 Injector Bank A32 Trailer33 Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)34 Ignition A35 Blower Motor36 Ignition B50 Passenger’s Side Trailer Turn51 Driver’s Side Trailer Turn52 Hazard Flashers53 Transmission54 Oxygen Sensor Bank B55 Oxygen Sensor Bank A56 Injector Bank B57 Headlamp Driver Module58 Body Controller 159 Electric Adjustable Pedal

506

Fuses Usage

61 Vehicle Stability EnhancementSystem (StabiliTrak®)

62 Regulated Voltage Control

Relays Usage37 Headlamp Washer38 Rear Window Wiper39 Fog Lamps40 Horn41 Fuel Pump42 Windshield Washer43 High-Beam Headlamp44 Air Conditioning45 Cooling Fan46 Headlamp Driver Module47 Starter49 Electric Adjustable Pedal60 Powertrain

Miscellaneous Usage48 Instrument Panel Battery

Rear Underseat Fuse Block

507

Fuses Usage01 Passenger Door Control Module02 Driver Door Control Module03 Liftgate Module 204 Truck Body Controller 3

Fuses Usage05 Rear Fog Lamps06 Blank07 Truck Body Controller 208 Power Seats

508

Fuses Usage09 Rear Wiper10 Driver Door Module11 Amplifier12 Passenger Door Module13 Rear Climate Controls14 Driver Side Rear Parking Lamps15 Blank

16 Vehicle Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)

17 Passenger Side RearParking Lamps

18 Locks

19 Liftgate Module/DriverSeat Module

20 Blank21 Lock23 Blank24 Unlock25 Blank26 Blank

27 OnStar® Overhead Battery,OnStar® System

28 Sunroof29 Rainsense™ Wipers

Fuses Usage30 Parking Lamps31 Truck Body Controller Accessory32 Truck Body Controller 533 Front Wipers34 Vehicle Stop35 Transmission Control Module36 Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning B37 Front Parking Lamps38 Driver Side Turn Signal39 Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning 140 Truck Body Controller 441 Radio42 Trailer Park43 Passenger Side Turn Signal44 Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning45 Rear Fog Lamps46 Auxiliary Power 147 Ignition 048 Four-Wheel Drive49 Blank50 Truck Body Controller Ignition51 Brakes52 Truck Body Controller Run

509

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 527 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for more information.Cooling System

4.2L L6 10.8 qt 10.2 L5.3L V8 12.2 qt 11.6 L6.0L V8 12.2 qt 11.6 L

Engine Oil with Filter4.2L L6 7.0 qt 6.6 L5.3L V8 6.0 qt 5.7 L6.0L V8 6.0 qt 5.7 L

Fuel Tank 22.0 gal 83.3 LTransfer Case Lubricant 2.0 qt 1.8 LTransmission (Drain and Refill) 5.0 qt 4.7 LWheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 YAll capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual.Recheck the fluid level after filling.

510

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

VORTEC™ 4.2L L6 S Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

VORTEC™ 5.3L V8 M Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

6.0L V8 H Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

511

✍ NOTES

512

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 514Introduction ............................................... 514Maintenance Requirements ........................ 514Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 515Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 515Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 517Additional Required Services ..................... 520Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 521

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 523At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 523At Least Once a Month ............................. 524At Least Once a Year ............................... 524Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 527Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 530Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 531Maintenance Record .................................. 532

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

513

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer for details.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary tokeep your vehicle in good working condition.Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance may not be coveredby warranty.

514

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps tokeep your vehicle in good working condition, butalso helps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it. You maydrive very short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements.So please read the following and note howyou drive. If you have any questions on how tokeep your vehicle in good condition, see yourGM Goodwrench® dealer.

515

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 350.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• are driven off-road in the recommendedmanner. See Off-Road Driving (Except SS)on page 317.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 384.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 517 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 520 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 521 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job.If you have any doubt, see your GMGoodwrench® dealer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work. See Doing YourOwn Service Work on page 383.

Some maintenance services can be complex.So, unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should haveyour GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer foryour service needs, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM parts.

516

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Informationon page 555.

Owner Checks and Services on page 523 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 527 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 530.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the change engine oil light or CHANGEENGINE OIL DIC message comes on, it meansthat service is required for your vehicle. SeeChange Engine Oil Light on page 212 or DICWarnings and Messages on page 220. Have yourvehicle serviced as soon as possible within thenext 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if youare driving under the best conditions, the engineoil life system may not indicate that vehicle serviceis necessary for over a year. However, yourengine oil and filter must be changed at leastonce a year and at this time the system must bereset. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer hasGM-trained service technicians who will performthis work using genuine GM parts and resetthe system.

517

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 404 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

When the change engine oil light or CHANGEENGINE OIL DIC message appears, certainservices, checks, and inspections are required.Required services are described in the followingfor “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”Generally, it is recommended that your first servicebe Maintenance I, your second service beMaintenance II, and that you alternateMaintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.However, in some cases, Maintenance II may berequired more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the lightor message comes on within 10 months sincethe vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II wasperformed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the lightor message comes on 10 months or more sincethe last service or if the light or message hasnot come on at all for one year.

518

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 398. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 404. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 406. See footnote (k). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 460 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Monthon page 524.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluidas needed. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”in this section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. See footnote (g). •

519

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damageor leaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 406. • • •

Change automatic transmission fluidand filter (severe service).See footnotes (g) and (h).

• • •

Change automatic transmission fluidand filter (normal service).See footnote (g).

•

Automatic transfer case only: Changetransfer case fluid. See footnote (g). • • •

Replace spark plugs. An EmissionControl Service. •

520

Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

V8 engine only: Inspect spark plugwires. An Emission Control Service. •

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first). AnEmission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt. AnEmission Control Service.See footnote (l).

•

Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect other brake parts,including calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering linesand hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace withgenuine GM parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appear wornor damaged or that streak or miss areas ofthe windshield.

521

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light andall your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look for anyother loose or damaged safety belt system parts.If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Alsolook for any opened or broken airbag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latchassembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor,release pawl, rear compartment hinges, outerliftgate handle pivot points, rear door detent link,roller mechanism, liftgate handle pivot points, latchbolt, fuel door hinge, cargo door hinge, locks,and folding seat hardware. More frequentlubrication may be required when exposed to acorrosive environment. Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

(g) Inspect hoses for cracks, chafing, leaks, kinks,and proper installation.

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filterif the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) orhigher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 411 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspected andrepaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluid ifneeded.

522

(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to helpensure the safety, dependability, and emissioncontrol performance of your vehicle. YourGM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you withthese checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 527.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oilif necessary. See Engine Oil on page 398 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failureto keep your engine oil at the proper levelcan cause damage to your engine not coveredby your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 411 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and addthe proper fluid if necessary.

523

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires and makesure they are inflated to the correct pressures.Do not forget to check the spare tire. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 452. Check tomake sure the spare tire is stored securely.See Changing a Flat Tire on page 472.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil LifeSystem service notification. Check the tires forwear and, if necessary, rotate the tires. SeeTire Inspection and Rotation on page 460.

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake on page 126.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediately ifit starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. Thevehicle should start only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in anyother position, contact your GM Goodwrench®

dealer for service.

524

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 126.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, tryto turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift leverposition.

• The ignition should turn to LOCK only whenthe shift lever is in PARK (P).

• The ignition key should come out onlyin LOCK.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.

525

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

526

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification may be obtainedfrom your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil(Except 6.0LV8 Engine)

Engine oil which meetsGM Standard GM6094M anddisplays the American PetroleumInstitute Certified for GasolineEngines starburst symbol.GM Goodwrench® oil meets allthe requirements for your vehicle.To determine the proper viscosityfor your vehicle’s engine, seeEngine Oil on page 398.


Engine Oil(6.0L V8

Engine Only)

The engine requires a specialengine oil meeting GM StandardGM4718M. Oils meeting thisstandard may be identified assynthetic, and should also beidentified with the AmericanPetroleum Institute Certified forGasoline Engines starburst symbol.However, not all synthetic API oilswith the starburst symbol will meetthis GM standard. You shouldlook for and use only an oil thatmeets GM Standard GM4718M.GM Goodwrench® oil meets allthe requirements for your vehicle.For the proper viscosity, seeEngine Oil on page 398.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolanton page 411.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluidor equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

527


WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Parking BrakeCable Guides

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, inCanada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Front Axle

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,in Canada 10953455) meetingGM Specification 9986115.


Rear Axle(Except SS

Model)

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,in Canada 10953455) meetingGM Specification 9986115.

Rear Axle(SS Model)

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,in Canada 10953455) meetingGM Specification 9986115.With a complete drain and refill add4 ounces (118 ml) of Limited-SlipAxle Lubricant Additive(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358,in Canada 992694) where required.See Rear Axle on page 434.

Transfer CaseAUTO-TRAK II Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 12378508,in Canada 10953626).

Rear DrivelineCenter Splineand Universal

Joints


528


ConstantVelocity

Universal Joint


Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch,Pivots, SpringAnchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges, BodyDoor Hinge

Pins, LiftgateHinge andLinkage,

Folding Seats,and Fuel

Door Hinge



Outer TailgateHandle PivotPoints and

Hinges


WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

WeatherstripSqueaks

Synthetic Grease withTeflon, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,in Canada 10953437).

529

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco® Part Number

Automatic Transmission Filter Kit 24208576 TF337

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15036141 A2014C

Engine Oil Filter

4.2 L6 89017342 PF61

5.3 V8 89017524 PF48

6.0 V8 89017524 PF48

Spark Plugs

4.2 L6 12598004 41-103

5.0 V8 12571164 41-985

6.0 V8 12571164 41-985

Wiper Blades

Front – 22 inches (56 cm) 15214346 —

Rear – 16 inches (41 cm) 15160740 —

530

Engine Drive Belt Routing

4.2L V6 Engine

5.3L V8 and 6.0L V8 Engines

531

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 514.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 523 can be added on the followingrecord pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

532

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



533

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



534

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 536Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 536Online Owner Center ................................. 539Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 540Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 540GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 541Roadside Assistance Program ................... 542Courtesy Transportation ............................. 545Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders ...................................... 548Collision Damage Repair ........................... 549

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 554Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 554Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 554Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 554Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 555

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

535

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentions of allconcerned, misunderstandings can occur.If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service, or parts manager, contact the owner of thedealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., contact the ChevroletCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GeneralMotors of Canada Customer CommunicationCentre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visible through thewindshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage(kilometers).

536

When contacting Chevrolet, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with yournew vehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlinedin Steps 1 and 2, you should file with theBBB Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your casewill generally be heard within 40 days. If you do notagree with the decision given in your case, you mayreject it and proceed with any other venue for reliefavailable to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program usingthe toll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and other factors. GeneralMotors reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue its participation inthis program.

537

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the eventthat you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the procedure outlined inSteps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada Limitedwants you to be aware of its participation in ano-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved by animpartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believe our impartialprogram offers advantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and freeof charge.

For further information concerning eligibility inthe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you maywrite to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

538

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle informationcan be found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

539

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing,or speech-impaired and who use TextTelephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance Center. AnyTTY user in the U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesChevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter shouldbe addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistanceChevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

www.Chevrolet.com1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(243-8872)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

540

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost ofeligible aftermarket adaptive equipment requiredfor your vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

541

Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S., call 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872)

In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800

Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Chevrolet RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as youdrive in the city or travel the open road.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litresin Canada). Service to provide diesel may berestricted. For safety reasons, propaneand other alternative fuels will not be providedthrough this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present the vehicle registration andpersonal ID before lock-out service is provided.Lock-out service will be covered at no charge ifyou are unable to gain entry into your vehicle.If your vehicle will not start, RoadsideAssistance will arrange to have your vehicletowed to the nearest authorized dealership.In the U.S., replacement keys made at thecustomer’s expense will be covered within10 miles (16 km).

542

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest dealership forwarranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: If your vehicle has a sparetire, installation of the tire in good condition willbe covered at no charge. The customer isresponsible for the repair or replacement of thetire if not covered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start will be covered atno charge.

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,

Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,computer-personalized maps, highlighting yourchoice of either the most direct route or themost scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along with anyhelpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly aspossible, but it is best to allow three weeksbefore your planned departure date. Triprouting requests will be limited to six percalendar year.

543

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:In the event of a warranty related vehicledisablement, while en route and over250 kilometres from original point of departure,you may qualify for trip interruption expenseassistance. This assistance covers reasonablereimbursement of up to a maximum of$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expenseyou may incur while waiting for your vehicle tobe repaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receiptsand a copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

• Alternative Service: There may be times,when Roadside Assistance cannot providetimely assistance, your advisor may authorizeyou to secure local emergency road service,and you will be reimbursed up to $100upon submission of the original receipt toRoadside Assistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures arecovered under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumperwarranty, and the duration of the Base WarrantyCoverage for Canadian customers of the newVehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost forparts and labor for non-warranty repairs are theresponsibility of the driver.For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:• Your name, home address, and home

telephone number.• Telephone number of your location.• Location of the vehicle.• Model, year, color, and license plate number.• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion to useour service, it is added security while traveling foryou and your family. Remember, we are only aphone call away. U.S. customers call ChevroletRoadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872), text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-888-889-2438, Canadian customers call1-800-268-6800.

544

Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of CanadaLimited reserve the right to make any changes ordiscontinue the Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty and is available onlyat participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.

545

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,you should contact your dealer and request anappointment. By scheduling a service appointmentand advising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,GM helps to minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters for the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used as ‘shuttleservice,’ the reimbursement is limited to theassociated shuttle allowance and must besupported by original receipts.

546

In addition, for U.S. customers, should you arrangetransportation through a friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses maybe available. Claim amounts should reflect actualcosts and be supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warranty repair. Rentalreimbursement will be limited and must besupported by original receipts. This requires thatyou sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary andmay include minimum age requirements, insurancecoverage, credit card, etc. You are responsiblefor fuel usage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service, maynot be available at every dealer. Please contactyour dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described herein at its solediscretion.

547

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,has a number of sophisticated computer systemsthat monitor and control several aspects of thevehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses on-boardvehicle computers to monitor emission controlcomponents to optimize fuel economy, to monitorconditions for airbag deployment and, if soequipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to helpthe driver control the vehicle in difficult drivingsituations. Some information may be stored duringregular operations to facilitate repair of detectedmalfunctions; other information is stored only in acrash event by computer systems, such as thosecommonly called Event Data Recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)in your vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed, safetybelt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,and the severity of a collision. If your vehicle is

equipped with StabiliTrak®, steering performance,including yaw rate, steering wheel angle, andlateral acceleration, is also recorded. Thisinformation has been used to improve vehiclecrash performance and may be used to improvecrash performance of future vehicles anddriving safety. Unlike the data recorders on manyairplanes, these on-board systems do notrecord sounds, such as conversation of vehicleoccupants.

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.

548

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement ormanual for information on its operations anddata collection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish your vehicle’sresale value, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

549

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GM part, may be anacceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available.These are made by companies other than GM andmay not have been tested for your vehicle. As aresult, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your GM dealermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

550

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing companymay require you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move it bya police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 542 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle beforeit is towed away. Make sure this includes yourinsurance information and registration if youkeep these items in your vehicle.

551

• Gather the important information you will needfrom the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company and policynumber, and a general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. If theyask for a police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and youcan get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. Insome states/provinces with “no fault” insurancelaws, a report may not be necessary. This isespecially true if there are no injuries and bothvehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealeror a private collision repair facility to fix thedamage, make sure you are comfortable withthem. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

552

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to the facility thatany required replacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycledparts will not be covered by your GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts.

Remember if your vehicle is leased you may beobligated to have the vehicle repaired withGenuine GM parts, even if your insurancecoverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have control of the repairand parts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

553

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou will notify General Motors. Please call theChevrolet Customer Assistance Center at1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

554

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repairservice procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

In Canada, the service bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your GeneralMotors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483). This reference number isneeded to order the service bulletin fromHelm, Inc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee

555

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The owner manualwill include the Maintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 US + Processing Fee

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 US + Processing Fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please specify yearand model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

556

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 382Accessory Inflator ........................................ 469Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 183Adding a Snow Plow or Similar

Equipment ................................................ 355Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 89Additives, Fuel ............................................ 385Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 500Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ............ 116Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 406Air Conditioning .................................. 185, 188Air Suspension ............................................ 361Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 200Readiness Light ....................................... 199

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 548

Airbag System ............................................... 71Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 89How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 79Passenger Sensing System ....................... 82Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 88What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 79

Airbag System (cont.)What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................. 80When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 77Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 74

All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 434All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System .................... 311Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 296Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System .................................................... 297Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 305Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 205Appearance Care

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 495Care of Safety Belts ................................ 493Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 497Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 494Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 489Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 491Finish Care .............................................. 494Finish Damage ......................................... 496Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 492Leather .................................................... 492Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 496Tires ........................................................ 496Underbody Maintenance ........................... 497

557

Appearance Care (cont.)Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 498Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 493Weatherstrips ........................................... 493Windshield, Backglass, and

Wiper Blades ........................................ 495Ashtray(s) .................................................... 184Audio System(s) .......................................... 234

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 294Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 296Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 296Chime Level Adjustment ........................... 297Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 296Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ......................... 277Radio with CD ................................ 236, 246Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 255Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................ 292Setting the Time ...................................... 236Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 293Understanding Radio Reception ............... 295XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 297

Automatic Headlamp System ....................... 179Automatic Transmission

Fluid ........................................................ 407Operation ................................................. 118

BBattery ........................................................ 428

Electric Power Management ..................... 182Run-Down Protection ............................... 183

Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 340Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 305Emergencies ............................................ 307Parking .................................................... 126System Warning Light .............................. 204

Brake Pedal, Throttle ................................... 116Brakes ........................................................ 424Braking ....................................................... 304Braking in Emergencies ............................... 307Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 112Bulb Replacement ....................................... 437

Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 437License Plate Lamps ................................ 439Replacement Bulbs .................................. 439Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps ............. 438

Buying New Tires ........................................ 462

558

CCalibration ........................ 133, 135, 138, 140California Fuel ............................................. 385California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 383Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 510Carbon Monoxide .............. 106, 130, 344, 363Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 493Your CD and DVD Player ........................ 296Your CDs and DVDs ................................ 296

Cargo Cover ............................................... 163Cargo Tie Downs ........................................ 164CD, MP3 ..................................................... 268Center Console Storage Area ...................... 160Chains, Tire ................................................. 468Charging System Light ................................ 203Check

Engine Light ............................................ 208Gages Warning Light ............................... 214

Check Gas Cap Light .................................. 215Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 390Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 497

Child RestraintsChild Restraint Systems ............................. 49Infants and Young Children ........................ 45Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 56Older Children ........................................... 42Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Outside Seat Position ............................. 63Securing a Child Restraint in the Center

Rear Seat Position ................................. 66Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position ................................. 66Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 54

Chime Level Adjustment .............................. 297Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 184Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 495Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 494Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 491Finish Care .............................................. 494Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 489Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ............................................... 492Leather .................................................... 492Tires ........................................................ 496

559

Cleaning (cont.)Underbody Maintenance ........................... 497Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 493Weatherstrips ........................................... 493Windshield, Backglass, and

Wiper Blades ........................................ 495Climate Control System

Dual ......................................................... 185Dual Automatic ......................................... 188Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 192Rear ........................................................ 193

Collision Damage Repair ............................. 549Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 38Compass .......................... 133, 135, 138, 140Competitive Driving ..................................... 317Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 110Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 304Convenience Net ......................................... 162Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 207Heater, Engine ......................................... 116

Cooling System ........................................... 416Cruise Control ............................................. 174Cruise Control Light .................................... 213

Customer Assistance InformationCourtesy Transportation ........................... 545Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 540Customer Assistance Offices .................... 540Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 536GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 541Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ..................................... 554Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 554Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 554Roadside Assistance Program .................. 542Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 555

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 179Defensive Driving ........................................ 300Delayed Locking .......................................... 102Disc, MP3 ................................................... 268Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 383Dome Lamp Override .................................. 181Dome Lamps ............................................... 181

560

DoorDelayed Locking ...................................... 102Locks ....................................................... 100Power Door Locks ................................... 101Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 102Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 105

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 26

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 216DIC Operation and Displays ..................... 217DIC Vehicle Customization ....................... 226DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 220

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 333City .......................................................... 338Defensive ................................................. 300Drunken ................................................... 301Freeway ................................................... 339Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 342In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 334Off-Road .................................................. 317Recovery Hooks ....................................... 349Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 348Winter ...................................................... 344

Dual Automatic Climate Control System ....... 188Dual Climate Control System ....................... 185DVD

Rear Seat Entertainment System ............. 277

EElectric Power Management ........................ 182Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 500Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 501Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 501Headlamps ............................................... 500Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 500Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..................... 507Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 500

Electronically Controlled Air SuspensionSystem .................................................... 361

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 406Battery ..................................................... 428Change Engine Oil Light .......................... 212Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 208

561

Engine (cont.)Coolant .................................................... 411Coolant Heater ......................................... 116Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 207Drive Belt Routing .................................... 531Engine Compartment Overview ................ 392Exhaust ................................................... 130Fan Noise ................................................ 422Oil ........................................................... 398Oil Life System ........................................ 404Overheating ............................................. 414Reduced Power Light ............................... 213Starting .................................................... 114

Entry Lighting .............................................. 182Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 548Exit Lighting ................................................ 182Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 41

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 406Finish Damage ............................................ 496Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 296Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 170Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 172

Flat Tire ...................................................... 471Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 472Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 486Fluid

Automatic Transmission ............................ 407Power Steering ........................................ 422Windshield Washer .................................. 423

Fog Lamps .................................................. 180Four-Wheel Drive ............................... 122, 435Front Axle ................................................... 436Fuel ............................................................ 384

Additives .................................................. 385California Fuel .......................................... 385Check Gas Cap Light .............................. 215Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 389Filling Your Tank ...................................... 387Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 386Gage ....................................................... 215Gasoline Octane ...................................... 384Gasoline Specifications ............................ 385Low Warning Light ................................... 215

FusesEngine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 501Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 501Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..................... 507Windshield Wiper ..................................... 500

562

GGage

Check Gages Warning Light ..................... 214Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 207Fuel ......................................................... 215Oil Pressure ............................................. 211Speedometer ........................................... 197Tachometer .............................................. 197Voltmeter Gage ........................................ 203

Garage Door Opener ................................... 149Gasoline

Octane ..................................................... 384Specifications ........................................... 385

Gate Ajar Light ............................................ 214Glove Box ................................................... 160GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 541

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 170Head Restraints ............................................ 17Headlamps .................................................. 178

Automatic Headlamp System .................... 179Bulb Replacement .................................... 437Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 179Electrical System ..................................... 500Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 172Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 437High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 172On Reminder ........................................... 178

Heated Seats ................................................ 11Heater ......................................................... 185Heater ......................................................... 188Highbeam On Light ..................................... 213High-Speed Operation, Tires ........................ 454Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 341Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 342Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 390Release ................................................... 390

Horn ............................................................ 170How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 26

563

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 113Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 45Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 452Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 168Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 181Cluster ..................................................... 196

JJump Starting .............................................. 429

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 96Keys ............................................................. 95

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 445Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 183Dome ....................................................... 181Dome Lamp Override ............................... 181Electric Power Management ..................... 182Fog .......................................................... 180Reading ................................................... 182

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 56

License Plate Lamps ................................... 439Liftgate/Liftglass ........................................... 106Liftglass/Liftgate ........................................... 106Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 199Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 205Brake System Warning ............................. 204Change Engine Oil ................................... 212Charging System ..................................... 203Check Gages Warning ............................. 214Check Gas Cap ....................................... 215Cruise Control .......................................... 213

564

Light (cont.)Gate Ajar ................................................. 214Highbeam On .......................................... 213Low Fuel Warning .................................... 215Malfunction Indicator ................................ 208Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 200Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 198Reduced Engine Power ............................ 213Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 198Security ................................................... 212Service Four-Wheel-Drive Warning Light .... 214StabiliTrak® Indicator ................................ 206StabiliTrak® Service .................................. 206Tire Pressure ........................................... 207

LightingEntry ........................................................ 182Exit .......................................................... 182

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 350Locking Rear Axle ....................................... 307Lockout Protection ....................................... 105Locks

Delayed Locking ...................................... 102Door ........................................................ 100Lockout Protection ................................... 105Power Door ............................................. 101Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 102Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 105

Loss of Control ........................................... 316Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 215Luggage Carrier .......................................... 161Lumbar

Manual Controls ......................................... 10Power Controls .......................................... 10

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 520At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 523At Least Once a Month ............................ 524At Least Once a Year .............................. 524Introduction .............................................. 514Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 521Maintenance Record ................................ 532Maintenance Requirements ...................... 514Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts ............................... 530Owner Checks and Services .................... 523Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 527Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 517Using ....................................................... 515Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 515

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 208Manual Lumbar Controls ............................... 10

565

Manual Seats .................................................. 8Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals ................ 11Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 220Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview withCompass .............................................. 138

Automatic Dimming Rearview withCompass and Temperature Display ....... 140

Automatic Dimming Rearview withOnStar® and Compass ......................... 133

Automatic Dimming Rearview withOnStar®, Compass and TemperatureDisplay ................................................. 135

Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 132Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 132Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 144Outside Curb View Assist Mirror ............... 144Outside Heated Mirrors ............................ 145Outside Manual Mirrors ............................ 143Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 143

MP3 ............................................................ 268MyGMLink.com ............................................ 539

NNavigation/Radio System, see Navigation

Manual ..................................................... 277New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 112Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 530

OOdometer .................................................... 197Odometer, Trip ............................................ 197Off-Road Driving .......................................... 317Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 314Oil

Change Engine Oil Light .......................... 212Engine ..................................................... 398Pressure Gage ......................................... 211

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 404Older Children, Restraints ............................. 42Online Owner Center ................................... 539OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 145Other Warning Devices ................................ 170Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 192

566

Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 183Outside

Convex Mirror .......................................... 144Curb View Assist Mirror ........................... 144Heated Mirrors ......................................... 145Manual Mirrors ......................................... 143Power Mirrors .......................................... 143

Overhead Console ....................................... 160Owner Checks and Services ....................... 523Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 496Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 127Shifting Out of ......................................... 129

ParkingBrake ....................................................... 126Over Things That Burn ............................ 129

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 200Passenger Sensing System ........................... 82

Passing ....................................................... 314Passlock® .................................................... 111Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 183Door Locks .............................................. 101Electrical System ..................................... 500Lumbar Controls ........................................ 10Reduced Engine Light .............................. 213Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 114Seat ............................................................ 9Steering Fluid .......................................... 422Windows .................................................. 108

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 41Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 102

QQuestions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................... 25

567

RRadiator Pressure Cap ................................ 414Radios ........................................................ 234

Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 296Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 296Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ......................... 277Radio with CD ................................ 236, 246Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 255Rear Seat Audio ...................................... 292Setting the Time ...................................... 236Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 293Understanding Reception ......................... 295

Reading Lamps ........................................... 182Rear Axle .................................................... 434

Locking .................................................... 307Rear Climate Control System ...................... 193Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 105Rear Floor Storage Lid ................................ 162Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 38Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 292Rear Seat Entertainment System ................. 277Rear Seat Operation ..................................... 18Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 35

Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 174Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with

Compass ................................................. 138Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with

Compass and Temperature Display .......... 140Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with

OnStar® and Compass ............................. 133Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with

OnStar®, Compass and TemperatureDisplay ..................................................... 135

Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...................... 132Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 132Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 14Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 527Recovery Hooks .......................................... 349Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 356Reduced Engine Power Light ...................... 213Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 96Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................... 98Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ................................................ 477Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 473Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 439

568

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government ............................. 554General Motors ........................................ 554United States Government ....................... 554

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 90Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 91Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 114Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 35Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 542Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 348Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 531Running the Engine While Parked ............... 131

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 198Pretensioners ............................................. 41Reminder Light ........................................ 198

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 493Driver Position ........................................... 26How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 26

Safety Belts (cont.)Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 25Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 38Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 35Right Front Passenger Position .................. 35Safety Belt Extender .................................. 41Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 34Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 20

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 517Seats

Head Restraints ......................................... 17Heated Seats ............................................. 11Manual ........................................................ 8Manual Lumbar .......................................... 10Memory, Mirrors and Pedals ...................... 11Power Lumbar ........................................... 10Power Seats ................................................ 9Rear Seat Operation .................................. 18Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 14

Secondary Latch System ............................. 482Securing a Child Restraint

Center Rear Seat Position ......................... 66Rear Outside Seat Position ........................ 63Right Front Seat Position ........................... 66

Security Light .............................................. 212

569

Service ........................................................ 382Accessories and Modifications .................. 382Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your

Vehicle ................................................. 384California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 383Doing Your Own Work ............................. 383Engine Soon Light ................................... 208Four-Wheel-Drive Warning Light ............... 214Publications Ordering Information ............. 555

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 88Setting the Time .......................................... 236Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 496Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 127Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 129Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 171Snow Plow .................................................. 355Spare Tire ................................................... 489

Accessory Inflator ..................................... 469Installing .................................................. 477Removing ................................................ 473Storing ..................................................... 486

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 510Speedometer ............................................... 197StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 307StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ........................... 206StabiliTrak® Service Light ............................. 206Starting Your Engine ................................... 114

Steering ...................................................... 312Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 294Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 170Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ................... 160Convenience Net ..................................... 162Glove Box ................................................ 160Luggage Carrier ....................................... 161Overhead Console ................................... 160Rear Floor Storage Lid ............................ 162

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 348Sun Visors .................................................. 109Sunroof ....................................................... 164Suspension ................................................. 361

TTachometer ................................................. 197Taillamps

Turn Signal Lamps ................................... 438Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 293Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 109

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 110Passlock® ................................................ 111

Throttle, Adjustable ...................................... 116Tilt Wheel .................................................... 170

570

TirePressure Light .......................................... 207

Tires ........................................................... 443Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ..................... 495Buying New Tires ..................................... 462Chains ..................................................... 468Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 472Cleaning .................................................. 496Different Size ........................................... 464High-Speed Operation .............................. 454If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 471Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 452Inflator, Accessory .................................... 469Inspection and Rotation ............................ 460Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 477Pressure Monitor System ......................... 455Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 477Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 473Secondary Latch System ......................... 482Spare Tire ................................................ 489Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 486Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 445Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 449Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 465

Tires (cont.)Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 466Wheel Replacement ................................. 467When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 462Winter Tires ............................................. 444

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 356Towing a Trailer ....................................... 363Your Vehicle ............................................. 356

TractionStabiliTrak® System ................................. 307

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ....................................... 407

Transmission Operation, Automatic .............. 118Trip Odometer ............................................. 197Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 171Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 171

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 295Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 465Universal Home Remote System ................. 149

Operation ........................................ 150, 156

571

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 304Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 350Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Customization, DIC ......................... 226Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data

Recorders ................................................ 548Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) .......................................... 499Service Parts Identification Label .............. 499

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 192Visors .......................................................... 109Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 203

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 195Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 220Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 170Other Warning Devices ............................ 170Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 466Different Size ........................................... 464Replacement ............................................ 467

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 54Windows ..................................................... 107

Power ...................................................... 108Windshield

Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning ... 495Washer .................................................... 173Washer Fluid ........................................... 423Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 440Wiper Fuses ............................................ 500Wipers ..................................................... 173

Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 174Winter Driving ............................................. 344Winter Tires ................................................. 444

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 274XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 297

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 515

572

2007 chevrolet trailblazer owner manual m · 2020-03-06 · how to use this manual many people read...

Documents